belimo actuadores general

8/22/2019 BELIMO Actuadores General

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/belimo-actuadores-general 1/173

2

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E

G - S u b j e c t t o c h a n g e .

©

B e l i m o A i r c o n t r o l s ( U S A ) , I n c .

Expanding Range of Actuators

Find the right Belimo product, at the right price,for a wider range of applications

New Cost Effective AF "R"

133 in-lb spring return, but without manual override

AFR24-SR US: for 2 to 10 VDC proportional control.

AFR24(-S) US: on/off control, 24 VAC power supply.

AFR24-3(-S) US: floating point control, 24 VAC power supply.

AFR120(-S) US: on/off control, 120 VAC power supply.

All AF "R" with built-in auxiliary switch (-S) are single switch,1X SPDT.

Save $25 list price when manual override is not needed.

Now available.

New NF 60 in-lb spring return

actuators with auxiliary switches

Proportional actuator with switch, on/off withtwo switches

NF24-SR-S: 2 to 10 VDC, with one built-in auxiliaryswitch, 1X SPDT.

NF24-S2: on/off, with 2X SPDT built-in.

More options when switching function isrequired.

Faster Running Time on LF Floating Point Actuators

90 seconds motor drive

LFC24-3-R US: 35 in-lb, spring return, floating point control, 90second running time. Includes built-in wiring connectors. Usedwith ZG-LFC114 mounting kit. Designed to retrofit TraneVoyager ® rooftop units.

LF24-3(-S): same, 150 second running time.

LFC24-3-S US: same, with built-in auxiliary switch, 1X SPDT.More options for your application needs.

New LM Series Actuators with

Brushless DC Motor

Constant running time, longer service life

Brushless DC motor technology provides constantrunning time independent of load.LM series models with brushless DC motor include:

LM24-3 US: for on/off, floating point control, 95 sec. running time.

LM24-3-T US: same, with terminal strip instead of cable.

LM24-SR-2.0 US: 2 to 10 VDC control and 2 to 10 VDC feedback, 95 sec. running time.

LM24-SR-T-2.0 US: same, with terminal strip instead of cable and no feedback.

LM24-MFT US: 2 to 10 VDC control and 2 to 10 VDC feedback, 150 sec. running time,or selectable.

Now available!

CONTENTS

Quick Reference

Actuators

AF/AFR Series (133 in-lb spring return)......6

NF Series (60 in-lb spring return) ............26

LF Series (35 in-lb spring return) ............44

GM Series (320 in-lb) ..........................66

AM Series (160 in-lb) ..........................80

SM Series (133 in-lb) ..........................86

NM Series (70 in-lb)............................98

LM Series (35 in-lb) ..........................114

Phased-out Actuators

Best way to size andselect actuators .............................130

Accessories

Mechanical Accessories ................132

Electronic Accessories ..................156

Contents/Belimo Overview ®

Visit us on the Web atwww.belimo.com

• Complete technical data foractuators and control valves.

• Build and save actuator/valveschedules.

• Place orders online.

©



3

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E G - S u b j e c t t o c h a n g e .

©


A F

N F

L

F

G M

A M

N M

L M

M e c h a n i c a l A c c e s s o r i e s

E l e c t r o n i c A c c e s s o r i e s

At Belimo we believe that by provid-ing our clients with high quality prod-ucts and outstanding customer serv-ice we contribute to the success of allinvolved: our customers and theiremployees, Belimo employees andshareholders, and suppliers.

The Belimo MissionBelimo is the market leader andprovides the best customer benefitsin developing, manufacturing, andmarketing electronic actuators for airdampers and control valves, andvalves used in heating, ventilation,and air-conditioning applications.

Product commitmentIt is our goal to provide the best tech-nical solution for our clients’ applica-tion needs. We continuously improveand expand our product offering tomeet current and future applicationrequirements. We introduce newtechnologies into the HVAC actuationindustry which provide immediate

user benefits. The latest innovationsfrom Belimo include:• Multi-Function Technology (MFT)• Characterized Control Valves (CCV)• Direct coupled globe valve

actuation (NV)• LONWORKS ® native actuation

®

New Explosion-Proof Housing

Easier to use, expanded application area

Improved design in the new Belimo ZS-260 explosion-proof housing offers simplified installation, more actuatoroptions, an expanded application area, plus a 25% costsavings. One housing is designed for installation of AF,NF, LF, GM, AM, and SM Series actuators. For class I,II, and III hazardous locations, and to meet requirementsof NEMA 4, 7, and 9 type enclosures. Operating shaftorientation is field selectable.

More functionality, 25% less cost.

New 5-Year Warranty The Belimo warranty is unconditional for the

first two years from the date of installa-tion. For the following three years, a

conditional warranty applies. Under thisconditional warranty, the consequences

of ordinary wear and tear, damage due to

negligence or improper use, or othercauses beyond our control are excluded

from warranty coverage.

New

Product Guide!

Your comprehensive

actuator and control

valve resource

• Features all Belimo actuators, controlvalves and accessories

• New product pricing and selection tableswith larger type

• Helpful ordering examples make it easierto configure your assembly

• Actuator and control valve specification

• Information on retrofits and phased-outactuators

• Simplified actuator selection chart

• New terms and conditions



4

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Actuator Product RangeOn-Off actuator application chart

®

Airside Products 2 4 V A C + / - 2 0 % ,

V D C + / - 1 5 %

1 2 0 V A C + / - 1 0 %

2 3 0 V A C + / - 1 0 %

V A r a t i n g

W a t t s r u n n i n g ( h o l d i n g )

M o t o r D r i v e

S p r i n g R e t u r n

O n - O f f

F l o a t i n g P o i n t

5 K Ω

r e s i s t i v e f e e d b a c k

1 0 K Ω

r e s i s t i v e f e e d b a c k

A d d - o n r e s i s t i v e

3 5 i n - l b [ 4 N m ] , A p p r x .

8 s q .

f t .

6 0 i n - l b [ 7 N m ] , A p p r x .

1 5 s q .

f t .

7 0 i n - l b [ 8 N m ] , A p p r x .

1 8 s q .

f t .

1 3 3 i n - l b [ 1 5 N m ] , A p p r x .

3 3 s q .

f t .

1 6 0 i n - l b [ 1 8 N m ] , A p p r x .

4 0 s q .

f t .

3 2 0 i n - l b [ 3 6 N m ] , A p p r x .

8 0 s q .

f t .

1 S P D T ,

6 A ( 1 . 5

A i n d u c t i v e ) @ 2 5 0 V

1 S P D T ,

6 A ( 2 . 5

A i n d u c t i v e ) @

2 4 V

2 S P D T , 7 A ( 2 . 5

A i n d u c t i v e ) @

2 5 0 V

A d d - o n

S e e P a g e N u m b e r

Power Power Running Control Torque AuxiliarySupply Consumption Time Input Feedback (based on 4 in-lb per sq.ft) Switches

LF24 US q 7 5 (2.5) < 40 to 75 <25o q q 44LF24-S US q 7 5 (2.5) < 40 to 75 <25o q q q 44

LF120 US q 7.5 5.5 (3.5) < 40 to 75 <25o q q 44LF120-S US q 7.5 5.5 (3.5) < 40 to 75 <25o q q q 44LF230 US q 7 5 (3) < 40 to 75 <25o q q 44LF230-S US q 7 5 (3) < 40 to 75 <25o q q q 44NF24 US q 8 5 (2.6) <75 <60 q q 26NF24-S US q 8 5 (2.6) <75 <60 q q q 26NF24-S2 US q 8 5 (2.6) <75 <60 q q q 26NF120 US q 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 q q 26NF120-S US q 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 q q q 26NF230 US q 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 q q 26NF230-S US q 7 6 (3.5) <75 <60 q q q 26AF24 US q 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 q q 6AF24-S US q 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 q q q 6AF120 US q 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 q q 6AF120-S US q 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 q q q 6AF230 US q 11 6.5 (2.5) 150 <20 q q 6AF230-S US q 11 6.5 (2.5) 150 <20 q q q 6AFR24 US q 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 q q 6AFR24-S US q 10 5 (1.5) 150 <20 q q q 6AFR120 US q 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 q q 6AFR120-S US q 10 6 (2.3) 150 <20 q q q 6LM24 US q 3 2 85 - 110 q q 114LM24.1 US (Bulk 32) q 3 2 85 - 110 q q 114LM24-T US q 3 2 85 - 110 q q 114LM24-T.1 US (Bulk 48) q 3 2 85 - 110 q q 114LM24-S US q 3 2 85 - 110 q q q 114LMC24 US(fast running) q 3 2 25 - 35 q † 114LM24-10P US q 3 2 85 - 110 q q q q 114LM24-5PO-T US q 3 2 85 - 110 q q q q 114NM24 US q 3.5 2 75 - 150 q q q 98NM24.1 US (Bulk 24) q 3.5 2 75 - 150 q q q 98AM24 US q 4.5 2.5 100-150 q q q q 80AM24-S US q 4.5 2.5 100-150 q q q q q 80SM24-S US(fast running) q 12 9.5 (1.2) 16 - 19 q q q q 86GM24 US q 6 3 135 q q q q 66

Note: New AFR… series: No manual override, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch (-S)† Torque 18 in-lb o <60 sec. @ -22°F [-30°C]

Damper Area x Rated Torque Loading of Damper = Total in-lb Required

(8 ft2) x (4 in-lb/ft2) = (32 in-lb) Belimo LF/LM 35 in-lb

Torque Loading in-lb/ft2

< 1000 FPM FPM FPM

Damper Blade 2 inch water column 1000-2500 2500-3500

Parallel blade/edge seals 7 10.5 14Opposed blade/edge seals 5 7.5 10

Parallel blade/no edge seals 4 6 8Opposed blade/no edge seals 3 4.5 6

Round 10 14 20

Selection

Contact the damper manufacturer and thesystem engineer for:

• Rated damper torque load• Design face velocity• Static pressure• Is fail safe required?• What is supply voltage (24V, 120V or 230V)?• What is the control signal

(on/off, floating point, proportional)?

N O N

- S P R I N G R E T U R N

S P R I N G R E T U R N



5


©


A F

N F

L

F

G M

A M

N M

L M



Airside Products 2 4 V A C ± 2 0 % ,

V D C + / - 1 5 %

1 2 0 V A C ± 1 0 %

2 3 0 V A C ± 1 0 %

V A r a t i n g

W a t t s r u n n i n g ( h o l d i n g )

M o t o r D r i v e ( D e f a u l t ) *

( … M F T U S a d j u s t a b l e 7 5 t o 3 0 0 s e c . )

S p r i n g R e t u r n

O n - O f f

F l o a t i n g P o i n t

2 - 1 0 V D C ( D e f a u l t )

4 - 2 0 m A * ( w / 5 0 0 Ω

r e s i s t o r )

6 - 9 V D C ,

2 0 V D C o u t p u t v o l t a g e

H o n e y w e l l S e r i e s 9 0 ,

0 - 1 3 5 Ω

L O N T A L K

O n / O f f *

F l o a t i n g P o i n t *

S t a r t a n d S p a n a d j . ,

S t a r t 0 . 5

t o

3 0 V D C .

S p a n 2 . 5

t o 3 2 V D C *

P W M a d j . ,

0 . 0

2 t o 5 0 . 0

s e c o n d s *

2 - 1 0 V D C ( D e f a u l t )

V D C V a r i a b l e ,

S t a r t 0 t o 8 ,

S p a n 2 t o 1 0 V D C *

3 5 i n - l b [ 4 N m ] , A p p r o x .

8 s q . f t .

6 0 i n - l b [ 7 N m ] , A p p r o x .

1 5 s q .

f t .

7 0 i n - l b [ 8 N m ] , A p p r o x .

1 8 s q .

f t .

1 3 3 i n - l b [ 1 5 N m ] , A p p r o x .

3 3 s q .

f t .

1 6 0 i n - l b [ 1 8 N m ] , A p p r o x .

4 0 s q .

f t .

3 2 0 i n - l b [ 3 6 N m ] , A p p r o x .

8 0 s q .

f t .

1 S P D T ,

6 A ( 1 . 5

A i n d u c t i v e ) @ 2 5 0 V

1 S P D T ,

6 A ( 2 . 5

A i n d u c t i v e ) @ 2 4 V

2 S P D T , 7 A ( 2 . 5

A i n d u c t i v e ) @ 2 5 0 V

A d d - o n

S e e P a g e N u m b e r

LF24-SR US q 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25o q q q 44LF24-SR-S US q 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25o q q q q 44

LF24-MFT US q 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25o q q q q q q q q ‡LF24-MFT-S US q 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25o q q q q q q q q q ‡LF24-MFT-20 US q 6 3.5 (1.5) 150 <25o q q q q ‡LF24-MFT-S-20 US q 6 3.5 (1.5) 150 <25o q q q q q ‡LF24-3 US q 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25o q q 44LF24-3-S US q 5 2.5 (1) 150 <25o q q q 44LFC24-3-R US q 5 2.5 (1) 90 <25o q q 44LFC24-3-S US q 5 2.5 (1) 90 <25o q q q 44NF24-SR US q 6 3 (1) 150 <60 q q q 26NF24-SR-S US q 6 3 (1) 150 <60 q q q q 26NF24-MFT US q 10 6 (1.8) 150 <60 q q q q q q q q ‡NF24-MFT-S US q 10 6 (1.8) 150 <60 q q q q q q q q q ‡AF24-MFT US q 10 6 (1.8) 150 <20 q q q q q q q q ‡AF24-MFT-S US q 10 6 (1.8) 150 <20 q q q q q q q q q ‡AF24-MFT95 US q 10 6 (2) 150 <20 q q q q ‡AF24-SR US q 10 6 (2) 150 <20 q q q 6

AFR24-SR US q 10 6 (2) 150 <20 q q q 6AFR24-3 US q 10 6 (2) 150 <20 q q 6AFR24-3-S US q 10 6 (2) 150 <20 q q q 6AF24LON US q 10 6 (2) 150 <20 q q ∆

LM24-3 US q 3 2 95 q q q 114LM24-3.1 US(Bulk 32) q 3 2 95 q q q 114LM24-3-T US q 3 2 95 q q q 114LM24-3-T.1 US(Bulk 48) q 3 2 95 q q q 114LM24-SR-2.0 US q 4 2 95 q q q 114LM24-SR-2.0.1 US(Bulk 32) q 4 2 95 q q q 114LM24-SR-T-2.0 US q 4 2 95 q q 114LM24-SR-T-2.0.1 US(Bulk 48) q 4 2 95 q q 114LMC24-SR US(fast running) q 4 2.5 25 - 35 q q † 114LM24-MFT US q 4 2 150 q q q q q q q q ‡NM24 US q 3.5 2 75 - 150 q q q q 98NM24-SR US q 3.5 1.3 150 q q q q 98NM24-SR.1 US(Bulk 24) q 3.5 1.3 150 q q q q 98NM24-MFT US q 3.5 1.3 150 q q q q q q q q q ‡AM24 US q 4.5 2.5 100-150 q q q q 80AM24-SR US q 5 2.5 150 q q q q 80AM24-MFT US q 5 2.5 150 q q q q q q q q q ‡AM24LON US q 5 2.5 150 q q q ∆

SM24-SR94 US q 4.2 2 100 - 200 q q q 86GM24 US q 6 3 135 q q q q 66GM24-SR US q 7 3 135 q q q◊ q 66GM24-MFT US q 7 3 150 q q q q q q q q q ‡GM24LON US q 7 3 150 q q q ∆

* Variable † Torque 18 in-lb ‡ All …MFT actuator details can be found in the Multi-Function documentation 2.5∆ All …LON actuator details can be found in the Belimo LONWORKS product documentation◊ GM24-SR US Torque will remain at 266 in-lbs o <60 sec. @ -22°F [-30°C]

Mechanical accessories……p.132 Electronic accessories……p.156

S P R I N G R E T U R N

List Price

Actuator Product RangeModulating actuator application chart

®

Power Power Running Control Control Input Position Torque AuxiliarySupply Consumption Time Input Multi-Function Feedback (based on 4 in-lb per sq.ft) Switches

N O N - S P R I N G R

E T U R N



6

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


AF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator ®

Applications

Minimum 133 in-lb torque

q For damper areas up to 35 sq-ft*(For lower torque, see NF or LF series)

ZG106 orZG 107bracket

Mount directly to 1.05” jackshafts.New standard clamp fits standard 1/2”

shafts to 1.05” jackshafts.Linkage solutions are available when direct coupling is notpossible. (See Mounting Methods Guide and Mechanical

Accessories Documentation page 132)

Remove

for 3/4”

to 1.05”

shafts

Torque: 133 in-lb q q q q q q q q q q q q q q

Power supply : 24 VAC/DC q q q q q q q q

120 VAC q q q q

230 VAC q q

Control signal: on-off q q q q q q q q q q q q

Floating point q q

2 to 10 VDC q q

Feedback signal: 2 to 10 VDC q q

Motor: 150 sec constant q q q q q q q q q q q q q

Spring: <15 sec q q q q q q q q q q q q q q

External direction of rotation switch q q q q

Manual override q q q q q q q

Appliance rated cable, 18 GA q q q q q q q q q q q q q q

Built-in auxiliary switch 2 SPDT q q q

1 SPDT q q q

Installation instructions ......(p. 16–21) General wiring ..............(p. 22) Start-up and checkout (p. 25)

Electrical operations..........(p. 21) Special wiring ................(p. 23–24)* 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. Parallel blade. No edge seals.

AF Series – at a glance A F 2 4 U S

( p . 8

)

A F 2 4

- S U

S ( p . 8 )

A F R 2 4

U S

( p . 8 )

A F R 2 4 - S

U S

( p . 8

)

A F 1 2 0

U S

( p .

1 0 )

A F 1 2 0 - S

U S

( p . 1 0 )

A F R 1 2 0

U S

( p . 1 0

)

A F R 1 2 0

- S U

S ( p .

1 0 )

A F 2 3 0 U S

( p . 1 0 )

A F 2 3 0

- S U

S ( p . 1 0 )

A F R 2 4

- 3 U S

( p . 1 2 )

A F R 2 4

- 3 - S

U S

( p . 1

2 )

A F 2 4

- S R

U S

( p . 1

4 )

A F R 2 4

- S R

U S

( p . 1

4 )



7


©


A F

A CLOSER LOOK…

AF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator ®

LISTED94D5TEMP. IND &REG. EQUIP.

UL

q Cut labor costs with simple direct coupling.

q True mechanical spring return – the most reliable failsafe.

q Reverse mount for clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe.

q Check damper position easily with clear position indicator.

q Overload-proof throughout rotation

q Temporary restrictions in damper movement will not change

actuator operation. Actuator returns to normal operation when

restriction is removed. (modulating actuators)

q Easy mechanical stop to adjust angle of rotation

(add ZDB-AF2 accessory).

q By eliminating internal condensation Golden Point

breather membrane optimizes performance in harshairstream environments.

q Built-in auxiliary switch is easy to use, offers feedback

or signal for additional device. (-S models)

q Manual override crank speeds installation

(Not available with AFR… series)

q Need to change control direction?

Do it easily with a simple switch. (modulating actuators)

q Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor increases

actuator life span and reliability, provides constant runningtime. (modulating actuators)

q Rugged metal housing withstands rough handling in the

mechanical room.

q 3 ft. appliance cable and conduit connector

eases installation.

q Double insulated – no need for separate safety ground.

A Belimo exclusive. (-S,120V, 230V models)

q Automatically compensates for damper seal wear, ensuring tight

close-off.

B e l i m

o ’ sC o m

mit m e n t t o

Q u a

l i t y

S i n c e 19 9 1

I S O 9 0 0 1

The Belimo Difference

q Customer Commitment.

Extensive product range. Competitive project pricing. Application assistance.

Same-day shipments. Free technical support. Five year warranty.

q Low Installation and Life-Cycle Cost.

Easy installation. Accuracy and repeatability.Low power consumption. No maintenance.

q Long Service Life.

Components tested before assembly. Every product tested before shipment.

20+ years direct coupled actuator design.



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


AF24 (-S) US, AFR24 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

Torque min. 133 in-lb, for control of air dampers

Application:For on-off, fail-safe control of dampers in HVAC systems.

Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications. Control is on-off from an auxil-

iary contact, or a manual switch.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05”

in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crankarm andseveral mounting brackets are available for applications where

the actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe AF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tight

dampers. The spring return system provides consistent torque

to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The AF and AFR series provide 95°of rotation and are provid-

ed with a graduated position indicator showing -5° to 90°.The AF has a unique manual positioning mechanism which

allows the setting of any damper position within its 95°of rota-

tion. The AF and AFR series actuators are shipped in the zeroposition (5°from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compres-

sion against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power isapplied to the AF series, the manual mechanism is released.

When power is applied to the AFR series its “one time use”mechanism is released. The actuators will now try to close

against the -5°position during its normal control operations.

The manual override can also be released physically by theuse of a crank supplied with the actuator (AF series).

The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC moni-

tors and controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digital

rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator ina stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its

normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.

The AF24-S US version is provided with 2 built in auxiliary

switches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety inter-

facing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switchingfunction at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, the other switch

function is adjustable between +25° to +85°. The AFR… seriesactuators are provided with 1 SPDT switch, adjustable

between 5° to 85°.

Dimensions (All numbers in brackets are metric.)

1.97"

3 . 1

5 " [ 8 0 ]

3 . 8

6 " [ 9 8 ]

3 . 1

0 " [ 7 8 ]

2 . 2

4 "

[ 5 7 ]

[50]

1 . 9

3 "

[ 4 9 ]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]

5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Optional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4 USclamp


UL

Technical Data AF24 (-S) US

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz

24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 5 W

holding: 1.5 W

Transformer sizing 10 VA (class 2 power source)

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable

1/2” conduit connector

Electrical protection auxiliary switches are double insulated

Overload protection electronic throughout -5°to 90°rotation

Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30 to 90°w/ ZDB-AF2

Torque 133 in-lb [15 Nm] constant

Direction of rotation spring return can be selected by

CW/CCW mounting

Position indication visual indicator, -5°to 90°(-5°is

spring return position)

Manual override 3mm hex crank (shipped w/actuator)

Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listedone set at +5°, one adjustable 25°to 85°

Running time 150 sec. constant, independent of

load, spring return < 20 sec

Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing

Ambient temperature -22°F to +122°F [-30°C to +50°C]Storage temperature -40°F to +176°F [-40°C to +80°C]

Housing NEMA type 2 / IP54

Housing material zinc coated steel

Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No. 24 certified

Noise level max. 45 dB (A)

Servicing maintenance free

Quality standard ISO 9001

Weight 6.0 lbs (2.7 kg.)

AFR24 (-S) US (same as above except)

Position indication -5°to 90°posit ion indication

Manual override Not availableAuxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed

adjustable 5°to 85°

8

D 0 0 1



9


©


A F

AF24 (-S) US, AFR24 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extensionIND-AF2 Damper position indicator

K4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshafts

K4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”

KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)

KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrench

ZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiter

ZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracket

ZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracket

ZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell ® Mod IV

replacement or new crankarm type installations

ZG-107 Mounting bracket for Honeywell ® Mod III or Johnson ®

Series 100 replacement or new crankarm type

installationsZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman ® MA 3../4..,

Honeywell ® Mod III or IV or Johnson ® Series 100

replacement or new crankarm type installationsZG-AF Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF

ZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NFZS-100 Weather shield (metal)

ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

ZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

For an overview of how to apply the accessories see pages

16 - 19. More detailed specifications can be found in ourMechanical Accessories section, page 132. Refer to our

Mounting Methods Guide for application details.

Note: When using AF24 US and AF24-S US actuators,only use accessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

AF24 (-S) US, AFR24 (-S) US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled

type which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of

direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actu-ators must be designed so that they may be used for either

clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators

shall have a manual positioning mechanism accessible on its

cover. AFR… will not. Actuators shall use a brushless DC

motor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.

Run time shall be constant and independent of torque. If

required, 2 SPDT auxiliary switches shall be provided with one

switch having the capability of being adjustable, AFR… 1

adjustable SPDT. Actuators with switches must be constructed

to meet the requirement for Double Insulation so an electrical

ground connection is not required to meet agency listings.

Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year

warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International

Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as manufac-tured by Belimo.

2

3

1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.

Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power con-sumption must be observed.

Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.

2

3

1

4

5

6

Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.



For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., AF24-S US incorporates two built-in auxiliaryswitches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,one switch is fixed at +5°, one is adjustable 25°to85°.

AFR24-S US 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, ULlisted, 5°to 85°

Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of anelectrical ground connection.

On-off wiring for AF24 US, AFR24 US On-off wiring for AF24-S US, AFR24-S US

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

AF24 USAFR24 US

LineVolts 3

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

AF24-S US

LineVolts 3

4

6

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

NC

NO

NC

NO

5°

25° to 85°

AFR24-S US

5S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

W 0 0 1

W 0 0 2



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



Application:

For on-off, fail-safe control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications. Control is on-off from an auxil-iary contact, or a manual switch.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05”in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crankarm andseveral mounting brackets are available for applications wherethe actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe AF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The AF and AFR series provide 95°of rotation and are provid-ed with a graduated position indicator showing -5° to 90°. TheAF has a unique manual positioning mechanism which allowsthe setting of any damper position within its 95°of rotation.The AF and AFR series actuators are shipped in the zeroposition (5°from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compres-sion against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power isapplied to the AF series, the manual mechanism is released.When power is applied to the AFR series its “one time use”mechanism is released. The actuators will now try to closeagainst the -5°position during its normal control operations.The manual override can also be released physically by theuse of a crank supplied with the actuator (AF series).

The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitorsand controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digital rotationsensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall con-dition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rota-tion without the need of mechanical end switches. The actuatorsare Double Insulated so a ground connection is not required.

The AF120/230-S US version is provided with 2 built-in auxil-iary switches. These SPDT switches are provided for safetyinterfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. Theswitching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, theother switch function is adjustable between +25°to +85°. TheAFR… series actuators are provided with 1 SPDT switch,adjustable between 5°to 85°.


AF120 (-S) US, AFR120 (-S) US / AF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC

1.97"

3 . 1

5 " [ 8 0 ]

3

. 8 6 " [ 9 8 ]

3 . 1

0 " [ 7 8 ]

2 . 2

4 "

[ 5 7 ]

[50]

1 . 9

3 "

[ 4 9 ]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]

5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Optional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4 US

clamp


UL

®

Technical Data AF120 (-S) US AF230 (-S) US

Power supply 120 VAC ± 10% 230 VAC ±14%50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Power consumption running: 6 W 6.5 Wholding: 2.3 W 2.5 W

Transformer sizing 10 VA 11 VA

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable1/2” conduit connector

Electrical protection actuators are double insulated




Direction of rotation spring return can be selected byCW/CCW mounting

Posit ion indication visual indicator, -5°to 90°(-5°isspring return position)


Auxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC,UL listed

(AF120/230-S) one set at +5°, one adjustable 25°to 85°

Running time 150 sec. constant, independent ofload, spring return < 20 sec


Ambient temperature -22°F to +122°F [-30°C to +50°C]

Storage temperature -40°F to +176°F [-40°C to +80°C]








AFR120 US (same as above except)


Manual override Not available, when powered theactuator will drive to -5°for damperpre-tensioning

AFR120-S US (same as above except)


Manual override Not available, when powered theactuator will drive to -5°for damper

pre-tensioningAuxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed


10

D 0 0 1



11


©


A F

AF120 (-S) US, AFR120 (-S) / AF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC


K4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshafts

KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)

KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1

Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiter


ZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracket


ZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell ® Mod IV replace-ment or new crankarm type installations



installations

ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman ® MA 3../4..,Honeywell ® Mod III or IV or Johnson ® Series 100


ZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)

ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing


16 - 19. More detailed specifications can be found in our

Mechanical Accessories section, page 132. Refer to ourMounting Methods Guide for application details.

Note: When using AF120/230 US and AF120/230-S USactuators, only use accessories listed on this page.

AF120 US, AFR120 (-S) US/AF230 US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled

type which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable

of direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. Theactuators must be designed so that they may be used for

either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall have a manual positioning mechanism acces-

sible on its cover. AFR… will not. Actuators shall use abrushless DC motor and be protected from overload at all

angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant and independ-

ent of torque. If required, 2 SPDT auxiliary switches shall beprovided with one switch having the capability of being

adjustable, AFR… 1 adjustable SPDT. Actuators must beconstructed to meet the requirement for Double Insulation so

an electrical ground connection is not required to meet

agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certi-fied, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO

9001 International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shallbe as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2



No ground connection is required.


2

3

1

3




For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup,etc., AF120/230-S US incorporates two built-in auxiliaryswitches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,one switch is fixed at +5°, one is adjustable 25°to 85°.

AFR120-S US 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, ULlisted, 5°to 85°


®

4

4

5

6

On-off wiring for AF120 US/AF230 US On-off wiring for AF120-S US/AF230-S US

1 Neutral

2 Hot1

2

120 VAC

230 VAC for AF230 US)

AF120 USAFR120 USAF230 US

3

4

L1 N

L2 H

120 VAC

(230 VAC for AF230 US)

1 Neutral

2 Hot1

2AF120 US

AF230 US

3

4

6

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

NC

NO

NC

NO

5°

25° to 85°

AFR120-S US

5S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

L1 N

L2 H

W 0 0 3

W 0 0 4



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



Application

For modulating or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.


Control is 3 wire, floating point from a triac or relay, or on-offfrom an auxiliary contact from a fan motor contactor, con-troller, or manual switch. The AFR24-3-S US is constructed tomeet the requirements for Double Insulated devices. These unitsdo not require a ground connection to meet electrical coderequirements.

OperationThe AFR series actuators provide true spring return operationfor reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on airtight dampers. The spring return system provides consistenttorque to the damper with, and without, power applied to theactuator.

The AFR series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing -5°to 90°. The AFRseries actuators are shipped in the zero position (5°from fullfail-safe) to provide automatic compression against dampergaskets for tight shut-off. When power is applied to the AFRseries its “one time use” mechanism is released.

The AFR uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an

Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a micro-processor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence to theASIC to provide a constant rotation rate. The ASIC monitorsand controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and provides adigital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actua-tor in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere inits normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.

The AFR24-3-S version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 5 to 85°.

The AF24-MFT (-S) US actuator with P-30… series configura-tions provides for floating point control, manual override andtwo auxiliary switches (-S). Please see the Multi-Function

Technology ® documentation 2.5 for more details


AFR24-3 (-S) USOn-off, spring return reversible, floating point, 24V

1.97"

3 . 1 5 " [ 8 0 ]

3 . 8

6 " [ 9 8 ]

3 . 1

0 " [ 7 8 ]

2 . 2

4 "

[ 5 7 ]

[50]

1 . 9

3 "

[ 4 9 ]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]

5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Optional*

3/8" to 3/4"

3/8" to 5/8"

*with K4 US

clamp


UL

®

Technical Data AFR24-3 (-S) US


24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 6 W ; holding: 2 W


Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cable1/2” conduit connector



Input impedance 1000 Ω (0.6w) control inputs



Direction of rotation spring: reversible with CW/CCW

mounting

motor: reversible with built-in switch

Position indication visual indicator, -5°to 90°

Manual override Not available

Auxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(AF24-3-S) adjustable 5°to 85°

Running time 150 sec. constant, independent of

load, spring return < 20 sec




Housing NEMA type 2 /IP54

Housing material zinc coated metal



Servicing maintenance freeQuality standard ISO 9001


12

D 0 0 2



13


©


A F

AFR24-3 (-S) USOn-off, spring return reversible, floating point, 24V


K4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell ® Mod IV replace-

ment or new crankarm type installationsZG-107 Mounting bracket for Honeywell ® Mod III or Johnson ®

Series 100 replacement or new crankarm type installations

ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman ® MA 3../4..,Honeywell ® Mod III or IV or Johnson ® Series 100replacement or new crankarm type installations

ZG-AF Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NFZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NFZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housingZS-300 NEMA 4X housing

For an overview of how to apply the accessories see pages16 - 19. More detailed specifications can be found in ourMechanical Accessories section, page 132. Refer to ourMounting Methods Guide for application details.

Note: When using AFR24-3 (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

AFR24-3 US, AFR24-3-S US Typical SpecificationFloating point, on-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a jack-

shaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actuators must be designed so that they may beused for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shallhave an external direction of rotation switch to reverse control logic. Actuators shalluse a brushless DC motor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.Run time shall be constant and independent of torque. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliaryswitch shall be provided with having the capability of being adjustable, AFR…1adjustable SPDT. Actuators with auxiliary switches must be constructed to meet therequirements for Double Insulation so an electrical ground connection is not requiredto meet agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

®

12

324 VAC Transformer

a open

a closed

The indication of direction

is valid for switch position CW.

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AFR24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

a

LineVolts

LineVolts



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

24 VAC Transformer

AFR24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

CCWCW

stop

a(3)

b(4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side

Direction of Rotation Switch

x x x x

x x x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

xx

x

x x x x

x x x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW

Wiring Diagrams

On-Off control of AFR24-3 (-S) US

Triac sink

Auxiliary switches of AF24-3-S US

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

ComHot

Controller

LineVolts

CCW CW

AFR24-3(-S) US



1

2

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

ComHot

Controller

LineVolts

CCW CW

AFR24-3(-S) US



1

2

4

5

24 VAC Transformer

Triac sink with separate transformers

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +Wht (4) +

ComHot

Controller

LineVolts

CCW CW

AFR24-3 (-S) US



1

2

5

24 VAC TransformerLineVolts

1 24 VAC Transformer

7AFR24-3-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

Floating point control of AFR24-3 (-S) US

2

3

4

5

6

7


Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power consumption must be observed.

May also be powered by 24 VDC.

The Common connection from the actuator must be connected to the Hot connectionof the controller.

The actuator Hot must be connected to the control board Common.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., AFR24-3-S US incor-porates one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5°to 85°.

Meets UL & CSA requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection.

Notes:

Triac source

W 0 0 5

W 0 0 6

W 0 0 7

W 0 0 8

W 0 0 9

W 0 1 0



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



Application

For proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.


The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from anelectronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedbacksignal is provided for position indication or master-slave appli-cations.

Operation

The AF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides constant torque tothe damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The AF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing -5 to 90°. The AF has aunique manual positioning mechanism which allows the set-ting of any damper position within its 95°of rotation. Whenpower is applied to the AFR series its “one time use” mecha-nism is released. The actuator is shipped in the zero position(5°from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compressionagainst damper gaskets for tight shut-off. When power isapplied, the manual mechanism is released and the actuatordrives toward the full fail-safe position. The actuator will

memorize the angle where it stops rotating and use this pointfor its zero position for its normal control operations. Themanual override can also be released physically by the use ofa crank supplied with the actuator.

The AF uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a micro-processor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence to theASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and to know the actu-ator’s exact zero position. The ASIC monitors and controlsthe brushless DC motor’s rotation and provides a digital rota-tion sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in astall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in itsnormal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.


1.97"

3 . 1

5 " [ 8 0 ]

3 . 8

6 " [ 9 8 ]

3 . 1

0 " [ 7 8 ]

2 . 2

4 "

[ 5 7 ]

[50]

1 . 9

3 "

[ 4 9 ]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]

5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Optional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4 USclamp

AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 V phasecut and 4 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication

Technical Data AF24-SR US


24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 6 W ; holding: 2 W




Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95°rotation

Operating range 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA

Input impedance 100 kΩ (0.1 mA), 500Ω

Feedback output “U” 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.5 mA) for 95°

Angle of rotation mechanically limited to 95°


Direction of rotation spring return reversible with CW/CCWmounting. Control direction selected byswitch: CW=CW with decrease in signalCCW=CCW with a decrease in signal

Position indication visual indicator, -5°to 90°(-5°is spring

return position)


Running time 150 sec. constant, independent of load,

spring return < 20 secHumidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing










AFR24-SR US (same as above except)Position indication -5°to 95°

Manual override Not available


UL

®

14

D 0 0 1



15


©


A F

AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication


K4 US Universal clamp for 3/8” to 3/4” shaftsK4-1 US Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft (Series 2)KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft (Series 2)KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrenchSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signalZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Universal mounting bracketZG-104 Universal mounting bracket



Series 100 replacement or new crankarm typeinstallations

ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman ® MA 3../4..,Honeywell ® Mod III or IV or Johnson ® Series 100replacement or new crankarm type installations

ZG-AF Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NFZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing



16 - 19. More detailed specifications can be found in ourMechanical Accessories section, page 132. Refer to our

Mounting Methods Guide for application details.

Note: When using AFR24-SR US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

2


Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power con-sumption and input impedance must be observed.


The ZG-R01 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mAcontrol signal to 2 to 10 VDC.

Only connect common to neg. (—) leg of control circuits

4

5

3

®

AFR24-SR US Typical SpecificationSpring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of directmounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actuator mustprovide proportional damper control in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or,with the addition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from

an electronic controller or positioner. The actuators must bedesigned so that they may be used for either clockwise or counter-clockwise fail-safe operation. Actuators shall have control direction ofrotation switch accessible on its cover. Actuators shall use a brushlessDC motor controlled by a microprocessor and be protected from over-load at all angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant, and inde-pendent of torque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be providedfor position feedback or master-slave applications. Actuators shall beUL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufac-tured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 0 to 10V

4 Y Input, 0 to 20V Phaseout

5 U Output 2 to 10V


5

3

2

4

Control Signal (+)

4 to 20 mA (–)

Feedback Signal (+)

2 to 10 VDC (–)

Ω

500Ω

LineVolts

1

2

Control Signal

(+)2 to 10 VDC

(–)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 0 to 10V

4 Y Input, 0 to 20V Phaseout

5 U Output 2 to 10V

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

AFR24-SR USAF24-SR US

AFR24-SR USAF24-SR US

LineVolts

1

2

W 0 1 1



16

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Installation InstructionsQuick-Mount Visual Instructions for Mechanical Installation

IND-AF2 Position Indicator(optional)


QUICK-MOUNT VISUAL INSTRUCTIONS

1. Rotate the damper to its fail-safe position. If the shaftrotates counterclockwise, mount the “CCW” side of the actu-ator out. If it rotates clockwise, mount the actuator with the

“CW” side out.

2. If the universal clamp is not on the correct side of the actua-tor, move it to the correct side.

3. Slide the actuator onto the shaft and tighten the nuts on theV-bolt with a 10mm wrench to 6-8 ft-lb of torque.

4. Slide the anti-rotation strap under the actuator so that itengages the slot at the base of the actuator. Secure the

strap to the duct work with #8 self-tapping screws.

NOTE: Read the “Standard Mounting” instructions, on the nextpage, for more detailed information.

m i n. 3 1 / 2 "

[ 9 0 ] m i n. 3 / 4 "

[ 2 0 ]

®

Removefor 3/4”to 1.05”shafts




17


©


A F

Installation InstructionsMechanical Installation

Standard Mounting

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

23

4 6 8 105 7 9

D a m p e r A r e a ( s q .

f t . )

Torque Loading (in-lb/ sq. ft.)

Torque LoadingChart

Mechanical Operation

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05” in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crankarm and sever-al mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft. The AF seriesactuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tight dampers. The springreturn system provides constant torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator. The AF…-S versions areprovided with 2 built-in auxiliary switches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fanstart-up. The switching function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, the other switch function is adjustable between +25 to +85°.The AFR… series are provided with 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed adjustable switch, 5°to 85°.

Automatic Airtight Dampers/Manual Override

The AF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with a graduated position indicator showing -5 to 90°. The AF has a uniquemanual positioning mechanism which allows the setting of any damper position within its 95°of rotation. A pre-tensioned springautomatically tightens damper when power is applied to the actuator, compensating for damper seal deterioration. The actuator isshipped in the 0 position (5°from full fail-safe) to provide automatic compression against damper gaskets for tight shut-off. Whenpower is applied, the manual mechanism is released and the actuator drives toward the full fail-safe position. While the AFR…series actuators do not have a manual override they do provide the -5°pre-tensioning feature.

Note:The AF…series actuator is shipped with the manual

override adjusted for a 0° position at the universal clamp (notat full fail-safe, -5°). This allows for automatic compression of

damper blade seals when the actuator is in use, providing

tight shut-off. This assumes that the damper is to have tightshut-off at the fail-safe position. If tight close-off is desired at

the opposite direction from fail-safe, the manual overrideshould be released so the actuator can go to the full fail-safe

position. See the manual override instructions.

1. Manually move the damper to the fail-safe position (usually

closed). If the shaft rotated counterclockwise ( ), thisis a CCW installation. If the shaft rotated clockwise ( ),

this is a CW installation. In a CCW installation, the actuator

side marked “CCW” faces out, while in a CW installation,the side marked “CW” faces out. All other steps are identi-

cal.2. The actuator is usually shipped with the universal clamp

mounted to the “CCW” side of the actuator. To test for

Determining Torque Loading and Actuator Sizing

Damper torque loadings, used in selecting the correct size actua-

tor, should be provided by the damper manufacturer. If thisinformation is not available, the following general selectionguidelines can be used.

Damper Type Torque Loading

Opposed blade, without edge seals, 3 in-lb/sq. ft.for non-tight close-off applications

Parallel blade, without edge seals, 4 in-lb/sq. ft.for non-tight close-off applications

Opposed blade, with edge seals, 5 in-lb/sq. ft.

for tight close-off applications

Parallel blade, with edge seals, 7 in-lb/sq. ft.


The above torque loadings will work for most applications under2 in. w.g. static pressure or 1000 FPM face velocity. For appli-cations between this criteria and 3 in. w.g. or 2500 FPM, the

torque loading should be increased by a multiplier of 1.5. If theapplication calls for higher criteria up to 4 in. w.g. or 3000 FPM,

use a multiplier of 2.0.

General Information

Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is to

be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator.For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and serv-

ice of the Belimo actuator on the shaft. The damper shaft must extend at least 3 1/2" from the duct. If the shaft extends less than 3 1/2"

or if an obstruction blocks access, the shaft can be extended with the AV 10-18 shaft extension or the actuator may be mounted in its

short shaft configuration.

®



18

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



adequate shaft length, slide the actuator over the shaft

with the side marked “CCW” (or the “CW” side if this is theside with the clamp). If the shaft extends at least 1/8”

through the clamp, mount the actuator as follows. If not,go to the Short Shaft Installation section.

Fig. A Universal Clamp and IND-AF2 Pointer (optional)positions indicating fail-safe and pre-load settings

3. If the clamp is not on the correct side as determined in step

#1, re-mount the clamp as follows. If it is on the correctside, proceed to step #5. Look at the universal clamp. If

you are mounting the actuator with the “CCW” side out,position the clamp so that the pointer section of the tab is

pointing to 0°(see Fig. C) and the spline pattern of the

clamp mates with spline of the actuator. Slip the clampover the spline. (Use the same procedure if the “CW” side is

out.) If your application requires a mechanical minimum

position, read the Rotation Limiting, Mechanical Minimum Damper Position section.

4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retaining clip.

5. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.

6. Slide the actuator over the shaft.7. Position the actuator in the desired location.

8. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp using a 10mm wrenchor socket using 6-8 ft-lb of torque.

9. Slip the stud of the anti rotation strap into the slot at thebase of the actuator. The stud should be positioned

approximately 1/16 of an inch from the closed end of the

slot. Bend the strap as needed to reach the duct. Attachthe strap to the duct with #8 self tapping screws.

Short Shaft InstallationIf the shaft extends at least 3/4” from the duct, follow these

steps:1. Determine the best orientation for the universal clamp on

the back of the actuator. The best location would be whereyou have the easiest access to the V bolt nuts on the

clamp.2. Engage the clamp to the actuator as close as possible to

the determined location.

3. Lock the clamp in place using the remaining retainer clip.4. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.

5. Slide the actuator over the shaft.6. Position the actuator in the desired location.

7. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp using a 10mm wrench

or socket using 6-8 ft-lb of torque.8. Slip the stud of the anti-rotation strap into the slot at the

base of the actuator. The stud should be positionedapproximately 1/16 of an inch from the closed end of the

slot. Bend the strap as needed to reach the duct. Attachthe strap to the duct with #8 self tapping screws.

9. If damper position indication is required, use the optionalIND-AF2 pointer. See Fig. A.

Jackshaft InstallationThe AF… series actuator is designed for use with jackshafts

up to 1.05” in diameter. In most applications, the AF actuatormay be mounted in the same manner as a standard damper

shaft application. If more torque is required than one AF actu-ator can provide, a second AF actuator may be mounted to

the jackshaft using the ZG-102 multiple actuator mounting

bracket. See page 23 for wiring details.

Correct pointer mountingposition when actuator isat 5° preload.

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

3 0

2 0

10

0 - 5

Correct pointer mountingposition if actuator is atfull fail-safe.

3 0

2 0

10

0

- 5

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

Correct clamp mountingposition when actuator isshipped from factory(with 5° preload)

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

2 0

10

0

CW

Correct clamp mountingposition if actuator is atfull fail-safe.

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

2 0

10

0

- 5

CCW

CWCCW

CWCCW

CWCCW

®

Fig. B



19


©


A F


Multiple Actuator MountingIf more torque is required than one AF actuator can provide, a

second AF actuator may be mounted to the shaft using the

ZG-102 multiple mounting bracket.Notes:The manual positioning mechanism cannot be used in

multiple actuator applications. .

Special Wiring and Additional Information: See page 21

Rotation LimitationThe angle of rotation limiter, ZDB-AF2, is used in conjunctionwith the tab on the universal clamp or IND-AF2 position indicator

which comes with the ZDB-AF2. In order to function properly,

the clamp or indicator must be mounted correctly. See Fig. A.

The ZDB-AF2 may not work in certain mounting orientationsusing the ZG-106 or ZG-107 mounting brackets. It will not work

with the ZG-108 mounting bracket. Limiting the damper rotationmust be accomplished by adjusting the crankarm linkage.

The ZDB-AF2 may be used in 2 ways to control the rotationaloutput of the AF series actuator. One use is in the application

where a damper has a designed rotation less than 90°. Anexample would be a 45°or 60°rotating damper. The other

application would be to set a minimum damper position which

can be easily set or changed without having to remove theactuator from the damper.

Damper rotation limiting1. Determine the amount of damper rotation required.2. Locate the Angle of Rotation Limiter (ZDB-AF2) on the

actuator so that its edge lines up with the degree grad-uation on the actuator face which corresponds with therequired rotation. See Fig. C.

3. Find the appropriate cross-hair location through the

slot of the limiter. This is the screw mounting location.4. Pierce through the label material to allow easy fasten-

ing of the retaining screw.

5. Position the limiter back to the desired position, mak-ing sure the locating “teeth” on the limiter are engagedinto the locating holes on the actuator.

6. Fasten the limiter to the actuator using the self tapping

screw provided.

7. Test the damper rotation either manually with the man-

ual crank or apply power and if required, a control sig-nal. Re-adjust if necessary.

Mechanical minimum damper positionIn order to use this procedure, the actuator must be mount-

ed for short shaft mounting. See pages 8 & 10.

1. Position the damper to its minimum position by usingthe manual crank or by providing the appropriate con-

trol signal to the AF24… modulating type actuator.2. Place the indicator on to the actuator spline in the

approximate position shown in Fig. D. Fasten it with

the retaining clip. Note that the mounting orientation isdifferent than the mounting used for Damper Rotation

Limiting .

3. Place the ZDB-AF2 rotation limiter on the actuator so

that it either makes contact with, or is as close as pos-sible to, the edge of the indicator. See Fig. E. Make

sure that the locating teeth are engaged into the locat-ing holes on the actuator. If all of the mounting teeth

do not align with the holes, the mounting location of

the indicator to the spline may have to be moved. Thelimiter would then be remounted to get the best posi-

tion match of both parts.4. Find the cross-hair location through the slot of the lim-

iter. This is the screw mounting location.5. Pierce through the label material to allow easy fasten-

ing of the retaining screw.

6. Fasten the limiter to the actuator using the self tappingscrew provided.

7. Test the damper operation either manually with themanual crank or apply power and if required, a control

signal. Re-adjust if necessary.

®

2 0

3 0

4 0

Screw secured atthese cross hairs

2 0

3 0

4 0

Secure angle-of-rotation limiter

Screw

Philips screwdriver

2 0

3 0

4 0

Angle of rotation

is now set at 40°.

Fig. C ZDB-AF2 Securing the Angle of Rotation Limiter

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

10

0 - 5

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

CWCCW

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

10

0 - 5

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

CWCCW

Fig. D

Fig. E



20

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Installation Instructions®

This method should not be used for outside air damper appli-cations. The damper will never go to the full close-off position.This may cause coils to freeze or other system problems. The

AF24-SR(-S) US wired to either the SGA24 or SGF24 can beused for minimum position setting and still provide full close-off.

Manual overrideThe AF series actuators can be manually positioned to easeinstallation or for emergency positioning.

1. The manual override will only work if no power is availableto the actuator.

2. Insert the manual crank (shipped with the actuator) intothe hexagon hole located on either side of the actuator. Anillustration, located on the label, shows the location.

3. Turn the crank in the direction shown on the label (clock-wise on the “CW” side, counterclockwise on the “CCW”side). It will take approximately 19 revolutions to rotatethe full 95°of rotation.

4. To lock the actuator in the required position, rotate thecrank quickly in the opposite direction, 1/2 of a revolution. The“lock closed” icon on the label shows the correct direction.

5. The manual override may be disengaged in 2 ways.- Rotate the crank about a 1/4 revolution in the same

direction as the initial winding. The “lock open” iconshows the correct direction.

- Apply power to wire 1 and 2. The actuator will automati-cally disengage the override function and will go to the“on” position in the case of the on-off versions. Or, in thecase of the proportional versions, go to the 0 signal posi-tion and then go to the position corresponding to thecontrol signal. The actuator will now work normally.

Testing the installation without powerThe actuator/damper installation may be tested without powerat the actuator. Refer to the manual positioning section of theinstructions. Move the damper to its full non-fail-safe positionusing the manual crank. Disengage the manual positionmechanism and have the damper go to full fail-safe position.Correct any mechanical problems and retest.

Auxiliary SwitchesThe AF series actuators may be ordered with 2 built-in SPDTauxiliary switches used for safety interfacing or signalling, forexample, for fan start-up. The switch position near the fail-safeposition is fixed at 5°. The other is adjustable between 25 and85° of rotation. The crank, supplied with the actuator, or a 3mm

allen wrench is used to adjust the switching position. AFR…series 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed adjustable 5°to 85°

Switch Rating

Voltage Resistive Load Inductive Load

120 VAC 7A 5A

250 VAC 7A 2.5A

Two methods may be used to adjust the switching point of theadjustable switch.

Method 1 - See Fig. F1 The actuator must be in its fail-safe position.2. Insert the crank into the hexagon shaped hole located in

the center of the adjustable switch pointer.3. Rotate the crank until the switch pointer is at the desired

switch point in degrees as shown.

Method 2 - See Fig. G1. Position the damper to the point at which you want the

switch to activate. This may be done by using the manualoverride or by providing the appropriate proportional sig-nal to AF24… modulating type actuator. The position ofthe switch pointer is not important during this step.

2. Insert the crank into the hexagon shaped hole located inthe center of the adjustable switch pointer.

3. Rotate the switch pointer to just past the switch point indi-cating arrow as shown.

30 4050

6070

80

25…85°

Factory setting 85°

30 4050

6070

80

25…85°

Rotate withcrank handle

30 4050

6070

80

25…85°

60° set

C r a n k H a n d l e

30 4050

60

7080

25…85°

Actuatorafter locking

30 4050

60

7080

25…85°

Switch operates

30 4050

60

7080

25…85°

Switch doesnot operate


Fig. F

Fig. G

Winding thedamper actuator

- insert crank handle- turn handle in direc-

tion of arrow

Locking thedamper actuator

- rotate crank handle1/2 turn in the direc-tion shown by the“locked” icon.

Unlocking thedamper actuator

(2 options)- rotate crank handle

1/4 turn in the directionshown by the“unlocked” icon.

- remote control by sup-plying power to theunit for > than 3 sec.

(Not provided with AFR…series)

Factory setting 85°

Rotate withcrank handle 45° set

5…85°

10 2030

40

50

607080

5…85°

10 2030

40

50

607080

5…85°

10 2030

40

50

607080


Fig. D

AF…series

AFR…series



21


©


A F

Installation InstructionsNon-direct mounting methods and electrical operation

®

GeneralThe AF series actuators utilize brushless DC motor technolo-gy. The AF uses this motor in conjunction with an Application

Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). In the On-Off versions ofthe AF, the ASIC monitors and controls the actuator’s rotation

and a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage tothe actuator. The AF24… modulating type actuators incorpo-

rate a built in microprocessor. The microprocessor provides

the intelligence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rateand knows the actuator’s exact zero position.

Brushless DC motor operationBelimo’s brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles of

stationary electromagnets housed inside of a rotating perma-nent magnet. The electromagnetic poles are switched by a

special ASIC circuit developed by Belimo. Unlike the conven-tional DC motor, there are no brushes to wear or commutators

to foul.

Overload protectionThe AF series actuators are protected from overload at all

angles of rotation. The ASIC circuit constantly monitors the

rotation of the DC motor inside the actuator and stops the

pulses to the motor when it senses a stall condition. The DCmotor remains energized and produces full rated torque to the

load. This helps ensure that dampers are fully closed and thatedge and blade seals are always properly compressed.

The AF… actuators are protected against overload by digital

technology located in the ASIC. The ASIC circuitry constantly

monitors the rotation of the brushless DC motor inside theactuator and stops the pulsing to the motor when it senses a

stall condition. The motor remains energized and producesfull rated torque during stall conditions.

Motor position detectionBelimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for poten-

tiometers for positioning in modulating type actuators. Insidethe motor are three “Hall Effect” sensors. These sensors

detect the spinning rotor and send pulses to the microproces-sor which counts the pulses and calculates the position to

within 1/3 of a revolution of the motor.

Electrical Operation

Crankarm for AF Series Actuators

KH-AF Non-direct mounting with ZG-108 mounting bracket

KH-AF crankarm including retaining ring. Caution: theretaining clip supplied with the clamp is not used to mount the

KH-AF crankarm.

Multiple dampers direct coupled to one actuator with link-age to operate the other damper.

The KH-AF (-1) crankarm is used in non-direct coupledmounting applications. The KH-AF (-1) may also be used to

simultaneously direct couple to a damper shaft and provide anadditional crank arm connection to a second damper. The

KH-AFV V-bolt kit must be used for this non-direct application

(see illustration below).

Two sizes are available:KH-AF For round shafts up to 3/4” or square shafts up to 5/8”

KH-AF-1For jackshafts up to 1.05”

KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF(-1) crankarm

Note: KH-AF (-1) crankarms cannot be used on AFSeries 1 actuators.

KH-AF (-1)crankarmwith KH-AFVV-bolt kit

KH-8crankarm



22

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Installation InstructionsGeneral Wiring

General Wiring Instructions

WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-

enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supplybefore attempting any wiring connections or changes. Makeall connections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow

all applicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect

and overload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment to

the actuator must be made with flexible conduit.

Always read the controller manufacturer's installation lit-

erature carefully before making any connections. Follow

all instructions in this literature. If you have any questions,

contact the controller manufacturer and/or Belimo.

Transformer(s)

The AF24 . . actuators require a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draws a maximum of 10 VA per actuator. The actuator

enclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts orcomponents to be replaced or repaired.

– EMC directive: 89/336/EEC – Software class A: Mode of operation type 1

– Low voltage directive: 73/23/EEC

CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digital

controllers from a separate power transformer than that usedfor actuators or other end devices. The power supply design

in our actuators and other end devices use half wave rectifica-tion. Some controllers use full wave rectification. When these

two different types of power supplies are connected to the

same power transformer and the DC commons are connectedtogether, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes in

the full wave power supply, damaging the controller. Only usea single power transformer to power the controller and actua-

tor if you know the controller power supply uses half wave rec-tification.

Multiple actuators, one transformerMultiple actuators may be powered from one transformer provid-

ed the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is

less than or equal to the rating of the transformer.

2. Polarity on the secondary of the transformer is strictly fol-lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuators

are connected to the common leg on the transformer and all No. 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the

hotleg. Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the trans-former will result in erratic operation or failure of the actua-

tor and/or controls.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal maybe powered from multiple transformers provided the following

rules are followed:

1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied

to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring dia-gram.

Wire length for AF… actuators

Keep power wire runs below the lengths listed in the Fig. H. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators to

determine the maximum run to any single actuator.

Example: 3 actuators, 16 Ga wire350 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 117 Ft. Maximum wire run

Maximum wire length:

Wire Size Max. Feet. Wire Size Max. Feet

12 Ga 900 Ft. 18 Ga 225 Ft.

14 Ga 550 Ft. 20 Ga 125 Ft.

16 Ga 350 Ft. 22 Ga 60 Ft.

Fig. H

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with the

AF24. . actuators. Use code-approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It is

good practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure the

splice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/or

wire-tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The AF24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that is

designed to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). In

some situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductive

load (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To

solve this problem, make one or more of the followingchanges:

1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.

2. Re-route the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the

shield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actua-tor common.

Initialization of the AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR USWhen power is initially applied, the actuator will first release

its preload position (This assumes a manual position has beenset, The AFR… is pre set from the factory). The actuator willthen rotate to the full fail-safe position. At this point the micro-

processor recognizes that the actuator is at full fail-safe anduses this position as the base for all of its position calcula-

tions. The microprocessor will retain the initialized zero duringshort power failures of up to 20 seconds. For power failures

greater than 20 seconds, the actuator would naturally return to

its full fail-safe position prior to the microprocessor losing itsmemory. The actuator will also re-initialize if the manual posi-

tion mechanism is used.

®



23


©


A F

Special Wiring DiagramsAF24-SR US

4 to 20 mA control with 2 to 10 VDC feedback output. The

feedback circuit can also be used with a 2 to 10 VDC input.

Override open. Both the override closed and the overrideopen circuit can be combined on one actuator. Wire the relaycontacts in series. Determine which signal has the highestprecedence and connect that relay electrically closest to theactuator.

Minimum position control from a voltage signal andthrough a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

Override closed.

q

q

q

q

2

1

1

2

3

(–)

(+)

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

4 to 20 mA

Control Signal

2 to 10 VDC

Feedback Signal


Connect actuator common (wire 1) to negative (–) leg

of control circuits only.

Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With4 actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor, a +2% shift ofcontrol signal may be required. Power consumptionmust be observed.

The 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control sig-nal to 2 to 10 VDC.


1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1 Input, 2 to 10 V

5 U Output 2 to 10V

AF24-SR USAFR24-SR US

Ω

500Ω

q

2

1

1

2

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

SPST

Line

Volts

Control Signal2 to 10 VDC

Override

“Closed” Circuit

Provide overload protection and disconnect asrequired.

Actuator drives to the low signal position when thereis no signal to wire 3 (SPST relay energized). Adjustreversing switch (L-R) so the low signal positions thedamper in its desired end position.


1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V


c

qq

q

q q

2

1

1

2

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Control Signal

2 to 10 VDC


Actuator drives to the high signal position when24VAC hot is connected to wire 4 (SPST relay ener-

gized). Adjust Reversing Switch (L-R) so the high sig-nal positions the damper to its desired position.CAUTION: Do not short 24 VAC hot to the (+) leg ofthe control signal or the controller may be damaged.


1 Common2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V


Override “Open”Circuit c

q

q

q

2

2

1

1

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts


SGA24 (NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount)are identical electrically. Both act as a manual posi-tioner when no signal is present on terminal 4. Bothact as a minimum positioner when there is a signal onterminal 4 (output on terminal 3 is either the controlsignal or the knob setting, whichever is higher).


1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V



N.C.

SGA24SGF24

1 Common

2 + Hot3 Output

4 Control Input

3

4

4

To otheractuators

q

®

5

5

3

3

3

33

3

N.O.

q



24

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Wiring multiple AF… and AFR… two position actuators

Wiring multiple AFR24-3 US actuators

Wiring multiple AFR24-SR US actuators to one shaft

Mounting:If the actuators are mounted on

the opposed ends of the shaft,

the actuator direction must be

selected carefully. Usually, the

direction of rotation is reversed.

AF actuators which may beused on one shaft:

MaxQuantity

Model Per Shaft

AF24(-S) USAFR24(-S) USAF120(-S) US 4AFR120(-3) USAF230(-S) US

AF24-SR US 4AFR24-SR US 4

AFR24-3(-S) US 4

1

1 Neutral

2 Hot



1 Common, Neutral

2 + Hot

3

3

q

L1 N

L2 H

q

q q

124 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

1 Common, Neutral

2 + Hot

3

3

q

q q q

AF24 USAFR24 US

AF24 USAFR24 US

2


Actuator and controller must have separate transformers.

To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch.3

3 21 24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AFR24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

q

q

q

q

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Wht (4) +

AFR24-3 (-S) US

CCW CW

q

q

q

q

The indication of directionis valid for switch position CCW.

2

3

1 Provide overload protection and disconnect asrequired.



q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U Output 2 to 10 V

(–)(+)


3

2

1

AFR24-SR US

q

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

3

AFR24-SR US

CCW CW

CCW CW

q

2



To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch.3

Special Wiring DiagramsWiring for multiple actuators on one shaft

Provide overload protection anddisconnect as required.

IMPORTANT Observe polarity onsecondary of transformers. Connectall actuator Wire 1 and Control Signal(–) to one leg of the transformer(bold line) and all actuator Wire 2 tothe other leg of the transformer. Incorrect polarity can damage controller or causeerratic operation.

Set reversing switch (L-R) as required by control logic.

When individual transformers are used for each actuator, the hot line from the transformeronly goes to one actuator. The common wire 1 of all actuators must be wired together.


2

3

4

4

2

1

To other

actuators

5

Parallel control of two or more actuators, with mechanically sep-arate shafts from a voltage signal using either one transformerfor all actuators or individual transformers for each actuator.

q

q

q

q

q


LineVolts

Control

Signal

1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V


1

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V


(–)(+)

q

q

3

®

5

5

5



25


©


A F

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US

®

Procedure

Control signal is applied to actuator.

Check power wiring. Correct any

problems. See Note 1.

Turn reversing switch to the correct

position. Make sure the switch is

turned all the way left or right.

Make sure the control signal positive

(+) is connected to Wire No 3 and

control signal negative (-) is connect-

ed to wire No. 1. Most control prob-

lems are caused by reversing these

two wires. Verify that the reversing

switch is all the way CCW or CW.

Check input signal with a digital volt

meter (DVM). Make sure the input is

within the range of the actuator. For

AF24-SR US this is 2 to 10 VDC or

4 to 20 mA.

Note: The input signal must be above

the 2 VDC or 4 mA to have the actu-

ator move.

Check damper torque requirement.

Actuator works properly. Test con-

troller by following controller manu-

facturer's instructions.

Expected Response

Actuator will move to its “Control

Signal” position.

Power supply rating should be ≥

the total power requirement of

the actuator(s). Minimum volt-age of 19.2 VAC or 21.6 VDC.


Signal” position.

Drives to “Control Signal” posi-

tion

Input voltage or current should

be ±1% of what controller's

adjustment or programming indi-

cate.

Torque requirement is ≤ actua-

tor’s minimum torque.

Gives ExpectedResponse

Go To Step…

Actuator operates

properly

Step 7

Power wiring correct-

ed, actuator begins

to driveStep 1

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 7

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 7

Controller output

(actuator input) is

correct. Input

Polarity Correct.

Step 6

Defective Actuator.

Replace Actuator -

See Note 2

Does Not GiveExpected Response

Go To Step…

No response at all

Step 2Operation is

reversed

Step 3Does not drive

toward "Control

Signal Position"

Step 4

Power wiring

corrected, actuator

still does not driveStep 4

Does not drive

toward “Control

Signal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Reprogram, adjust

repair or replace

controller as needed.

Step 1

Recalculate actuator

requirement and

correct installation.

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

7.

8.

Note 1 Check that the transformer(s) are sized properly.

• If a common transformer is used, make sure that polarity is observed on the secondary. This means connect all No. 1

wires to one leg of the transformer and all No. 2 wires to the other leg of the transformer.

• If multiple transformers are used with one control signal, make sure all No. 1 wires are tied together and tied to control

signal negative (-).

• Controllers and actuators must have separate 24 VAC/VDC power sources.

Note 2 If failure occurs within 5 years from original installation date, notify Belimo and give details of the application.

AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US Electrical check-out procedure



26

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


NF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator ®


q For damper areas up to 15 sq-ft*

Torque: 60 in-lb q q q q q q q q q

Power supply : 24 VAC q q q q q

120 VAC q q

120 VAC q q

Control signal: on-off q q q q q q q

Control signal: proportional 2 to 10 VDC q q

Feedback signal: 2 to 10 VDC q q

Running time motor <75 sec q q q q q q q

motor 150 sec constant q q

spring <60 sec q q q q q q q q q

External direction of rotation switch q q

Appliance rated cable, 18 GA q q q q q q q

Built-in auxiliary switch q q q q

Two built-in auxiliary switches q

Installation instructions ......(p. 34–38) Special wiring ................(p. 40–41)General wiring ..................(p. 39) Start-up and checkout ..(p. 42)

NF Series – at a glance

K4-1

Clamp

ZG106 or

ZG 107

bracket

* 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. Parallel blade. No edge seals.

Mount directly to 1.05” jackshafts with

accessory clamp.

Linkage is available when direct coupling is

not possible. (See Mounting Methods Guide5.1 and Mechanical Accessories Doc 4.2)

N F 2 4

U S

( p . 2

8 )

N F 2 4

U S

- S ( p .

2 8 )

N F 2 4

U S

- S 2

( p . 2

8 )

N F 1 2 0 U S

( p . 3 0 )

N F 1 2 0 - S

U S

( p . 3

0 )

N F 2 3 0 U S

( p . 3

0 )

N F 2 3 0 - S

U S

( p . 3

0 )

N F 2 4

- S R

U S

( p . 3

2 )

N F 2 4

- S R

- S U

S ( p .

3 2 )

Applications



27


©


N F

A CLOSER LOOK…

NF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator ®


UL



q Mount for clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe.


q Don’t worry about actuator burn-out.

Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation

q Easy mechanical stop to adjust angle of rotation.(add ZDB-AF2 accessory).


Do it easily with a simple switch. (NF24-SR US)

q Golden Point breather membrane optimizes

performance in harsh airstream environments.

q Built-in auxiliary switch(s) is easy to use, offers feedback

or signal for additional device. (NF24-S2 US has two switches,NF24-S US, NF120-S US, NF230-S US)


actuator life span and reliability, provides constant running

time. (NF24-SR US)


mechanical room.

q 3 ft. appliance rated cable and conduit connector

eases installation.

B e l i m

o ’ sC o m

mit m e n t t o

Q u a

l i t

y

S i n c e 19 9 1

I S O 9 0 0 1






Easy installation. Accuracy and repeatability.

Low power consumption. No maintenance.






D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



Application:For on-off, fail-safe control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the damper

manufacturer’s specifications. Control is on-off from an auxil-iary contact, or a manual switch.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05”in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crank arm and

several mounting brackets are available for applications wherethe actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe NF series actuators provide true spring return operation

for reliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air

tight dampers. The spring return system provides constanttorque to the damper with, and without, power applied to theactuator.

The NF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with a

graduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°.The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotation

without the need of mechanical end switches.

The NF24-S US version is provided with 1 built in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or

signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching function

is adjustable between 5°and 85°.

The NF24-S2 US version is provided with 2 built-in auxiliary

switches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety inter-facing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching

function at the fail-safe position is fixed at +5°, the otherswitch function is adjustable between +25° to +85°.

NF24 (-S,-S2) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

Technical Data NF24 (-S) US

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 5 Wholding: 2.6 W




Overload protection Electronic throughout 0 to 95°rotation

Electrical protection Auxiliary switches are double insulated

Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30 to 95°w/ accessories

Torque 60 in-lb [7 Nm] constant torque

Direction of rotation spring return can be selected byCW/CCW mounting

Position indication visual indicator, 0°to 95°(0°is springreturn position)

Auxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listedadjustable 5°to 85°

Running time motor: < 75 sec

spring: < 60 secHumidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing





Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No.24 certified





Technical Data NF24 (-S2) USAuxiliary switches 2 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed

one set at +5°, one adjustable 25°to 85°

(NF24-S)

(nominal)

1.97"

3 . 1

5 " [ 8 0 ]

3 . 8

6 " [ 9 8 ]

3 . 1

0 " [ 7 8 ]

2 . 2

4 "

[ 5 7 ]

[50]

1 . 9

3 "

[ 4 9 ]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]

5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

Damper Shaft

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Damper ShaftOptional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4US clamp

3/8" to 5/8"

Dimensions (All ratings in brackets are metric.)


UL

D 0 1 1

28



29


©


N F

NF24 (-S-S2) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension

IND-AF2 Damper position indicator

K4-1 Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaft

KH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft

KH-AFV V-bolt kit for KH-AF and KH-AF-1Tool-01 10 mm wrench

ZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracket

ZG-101 Universal mounting bracket


ZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell ® Mod IV replace-

ment or new crankarm type installations




Honeywell ® Mod III or IV or Johnson ® Series 100replacement or new crankarm type installations

ZG-AF Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF




Note: When using NF24(-S, -S2) US actuators, only use

accessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

NF24 US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled

type which require no crankarm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The

actuators must be designed so that they may be used for

either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.

Actuators shall be protected from overload at all angles of

rotation. If required, 1 or 2 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be pro-

vided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators

with auxiliary switches must be constructed to meet the

requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical ground is

not required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be UL

listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, and be man-

ufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control

Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

2

3




2

3

1

4

5




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF24-S US incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5°to 85°. NF24-S2 US incorporates twobuilt-in auxiliary switches: 2 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250VAC, UL listed, one switch is fixed at +5°, one isadjustable 25° to 85°.

Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of an

electrical ground connection.

On-off wiring for NF24 US On-off wiring for NF24-S US

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

NF24 (-S,-S2) US

LineVolts 3

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

NF24-S US2NF24-S2 US

LineVolts 3

4

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

4

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

NC

NO

NC

NO

5°

25° to 85°

W 0 6 3

W 0 6 4



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


NF120 (-S) US / NF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC





The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05”

in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crank arm andseveral mounting brackets are available for applications where

the actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe NF series actuators provide true spring return operation

for reliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air

tight dampers. The spring return system provides constanttorque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the

actuator.The NF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with a

graduated position indicator showing 0°to 95°.

The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its normal rotationwithout the need of mechanical end switches.

The NF120-S / NF230-S US versions are provided with 1

built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safe-ty interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The

switching function is adjustable between 5° and 85°.

Technical Data NF120 (-S) US NF230 (-S) US

Power supply 120 VAC ± 10% 230 VAC ± 10%

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Power consumption running: 6 W 6 W

holding: 3.5 W 3.5W

Transformer sizing 7 VA 7 VA




Electrical protection Auxiliary switches are double insulated

Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30 to 95°w/ accessories


Direction of rotation spring return can be selected by

CW/CCW mounting

Position indication visual indicator, 0°to 95°(0°is spring

return position)

Auxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC,(-S models) UL listed, adjustable 5°to 85°

Running time motor: < 75 sec

spring: < 60 sec












UL

®

(nominal)

30

1.97"

3 . 1

5 " [ 8 0 ]

3 . 8

6 " [ 9 8 ]

3 . 1

0 " [ 7 8 ]

2 . 2

4 "

[ 5 7 ]

[50]

1 . 9

3 "

[ 4 9 ]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]

5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

Damper Shaft

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Damper ShaftOptional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4US clamp

3/8" to 5/8"


D 0 1 1



31


©


N F

NF120 (-S) US / NF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120 or 230 VAC


K4-1 Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”

KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaftKH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft


Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiter


ZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracket





installations

ZG-108 Mounting bracket for Barber Colman ® MA 3../4..,Honeywell ® Mod III or IV or Johnson ® Series 100


ZG-AF108 Crankarm adaptor kit for AF/NF

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)


Note: When using NF120 US, NF120-S, NF230 US and

NF230-S US actuators, only use accessories listed on thispage.

NF120 US / NF230 US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled


of direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. Theactuators must be designed so that they may be used for

either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.Actuators shall be protected from overload at all angles of

rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be providedhaving the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with aux-

iliary switches must be constructed to meet the requirements

for Double Insulation so an electrical ground is not required tomeet agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA

certified, have a 5 year warranty, and be manufactured underISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards. Actuators

shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2




2

3

1

3




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF120-S US and NF230-S incorporate onebuilt-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250VAC, UL listed, adjustable 5° to 85°.


®

4

5

On-off wiring for NF120 US / NF230 US On-off wiring for NF120-S US / NF230-S US

1 Neutral

2 Hot

3 Ground

1

2

120 VAC

NF120 USNF230 US

Wht N

Blk H

1 Neutral

2 Hot

2

3

4

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

NF120-S USNF230-S US

1

120 VAC

L1 N

L2 H

W 0 6 6

W 0 6 7



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


NF24-SR(-S) USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication


ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05”in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crank arm andseveral mounting brackets are available for applications wherethe actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from anelectronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signalis provided for position indication or master-slave applications.

OperationThe NF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides constant torque tothe damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The NF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°.

The NF24-SR US uses a brushless DC motor which is con-trolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) anda microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelli-gence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and toknow the actuator’s exact fail-safe position. The ASIC moni-tors and controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and pro-vides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage tothe actuator in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalledanywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechani-cal end switches.

Technical Data NF24-SR US


24 VDC ± 10%


holding: 1 W





Operating Range 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20mA



Angle of rotation 95°, adjustable 30°to 95°w/accessory


Direction of rotation spring return reversible with CW/CCW

mounting. Control direction selected by

switch: CW=CW with decrease in signal

CCW=CCW with a decrease in signal

Position indication visual indicator, 0°to 95°

(0°is spring return position)

Auxiliary switches 1 x SPDT 7A (2.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed


Running time motor: 150 sec constant,

independent of load

spring: < 60 sec











UL

®

(nominal)

(NF24-SR(-S)

1.97"

3 . 1

5 " [ 8 0 ]

3 . 8

6 " [ 9 8 ]

3 . 1

0 " [ 7 8 ]

2 . 2

4 "

[ 5 7 ]

[50]

1 . 9

3 "

[ 4 9 ]

2.64"[67]

0.26" [6.5]

5.85" [148.5]

10.59" [269]

0.35" [9]

0.39" [10]

0.65" [16.5]

0.19" [5]

Damper ShaftStandard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Damper Shaft

Optional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4US clamp

3/8" to 5/8"


D 0 1 1

32



33


©


N F

NF24-SR(-S) USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication


K4-1 Universal clamp for up to 1.05” dia jackshaftsK4-H Universal clamp for hexshafts 3/8” to 5/8”

KH-AF Crankarm for up to 3/4” round shaftKH-AF-1 Crankarm for up to 1.05” jackshaft


PTA-250 Pulse width modulation interfaceTool-01 10 mm wrench

SGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mounting

ZDB-AF2 Angle of rotation limiter



ZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZG-106 Mounting bracket for Honeywell ® Mod IV replace-

ment or new crankarm type installations




Honeywell ® Mod III or IV or Johnson ® Series 100





Note: When using NF24-SR US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

NF24-SR US Typical SpecificationSpring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupled

type which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable ofdirect mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. The actu-

ator must provide proportional damper control in response toa 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to

20 mA control input from an electronic controller or positioner.The actuators must be designed so that they may be used for

either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.

Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor controlled by amicroprocessor and be protected from overload at all angles of

rotation. Run time shall be constant, and independent oftorque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided for

position feedback or master-slave applications. Actuators shall

be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 5 year warranty, and bemanufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control

Standards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2



Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.3

®

2


Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With4 actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor. Power con-sumption must be observed.


A 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control signalto 2 to 10 VDC. (ZG-R01)

Only connect common to neg. (–) leg of control circuits

For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., NF24-SR US incorporates a built-in auxiliary

switch: 1 x SPDT, 7A (2.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 5°to 85°.

4

5

6

3

4 to 20 mA control of NF24-SR US with 2 to 10 VDC feed-back output

0 to 10 VDC control of NF24-SR US Auxiliary switch wiring

Control Signal

(+)0 to 10 VDC

(–)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1 Input, 0 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

NF24-SR US

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

Input, 0 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V


5

3

2

4

NF24-SR US

Control Signal (+)

0 to 20 mA (–)

Feedback Signal (+)

2 to 10 VDC (–)

Ω

500Ω

LineVolts

To otheractuators

NF24-SR-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO5° to 85°

W 0 6 8

W 0 6 9

W 1 4 6



34

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



®




1. Rotate the damper to its failsafe position. If the shaft rotatescounterclockwise, mount the “CCW” side of the actuator out.If it rotates clockwise, mount the actuator with the “CW” sideout.

2. If the universal clamp is not on the correct side of the actua-tor, move it to the correct side for ease of installation.


4. Slide the anti-rotation strap under the actuator so that itengages the slot at the base of the actuator. Secure thestrap to the duct work with #8 self-tapping screws.

NOTE: Read the “Standard Mounting” instructions, on the nextpage, for more detailed information.

m i n. 3 1 / 2 "

[ 9 0 ] m i n. 3 / 4 "

[ 2 0 ]

1/4" 1/4"

1/4" 1/4"




35


©


N F


Standard Mounting

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

23

4 6 8 105 7 9

D a m p e r A r e a ( s q .

f t . )


Torque LoadingChart


The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1.05” in diameter by means of its universal clamp. A crank arm and sever-al mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

The NF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The NF series provides 95° of rotation and is provided with a graduated position indicator showing 0° to 95°.

The NF…-S versions are provided with 1 built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling,

for example, for fan start-up. The switching function is adjustable between 5°and 85°. (NF24-S2, with 2 built-in switches, adjustablebetween +25° and +85°)

1. See Fig. B. Manually move the damper to the fail-safe

position (a) (usually closed). If the shaft rotated counter-clockwise ( ), this is a CCW installation. If the shaft

rotated clockwise ( ), this is a CW installation. In aCCW installation, the actuator side marked “CCW” faces

out, while in a CW installation, the side marked “CW”faces out. All other steps are identical.

2. The actuator is usually shipped with the universal clamp

mounted to the “CCW” side of the actuator. To test foradequate shaft length, slide the actuator over the shaft

with the side marked “CCW” (or the “CW” side if this is theside with the clamp). If the shaft extends at least 1/8”

through the clamp, mount the actuator as follows. If not,go to the Short Shaft Installation section.


Damper torque loadings, used in selecting the correct size actua-tor, should be provided by the damper manufacturer. If this

information is not available, the following general selectionguidelines can be used.



Parallel blade, without edge seals, 4 in-lb/sq. ft.

for non-tight close-off applications



Parallel blade, with edge seals, 7 in-lb/sq. ft.for tight close-off applications

The above torque loadings will work for most applications under

2 in. w.g. static pressure or 1000 FPM face velocity. For appli-cations between this criteria and 3 in. w.g. or 2500 FPM, the

torque loading should be increased by a multiplier of 1.5. If the

application calls for higher criteria up to 4 in. w.g. or 3000 FPM,use a multiplier of 2.0.

General Information

Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is to

be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator.For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and serv-

ice of the Belimo actuator on the shaft. The damper shaft must extend at least 3 1/2" from the duct. If the shaft extends less than 3 1/2"

or if an obstruction blocks access, the shaft can be extended with the AV 10-18 shaft extension or the actuator may be mounted in its

short shaft configuration.

®



36

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



Figure A Universal Clamp and IND-AF2 PositionIndicator (optional)

3. If the clamp is not on the correct side as determined in step

#1, re-mount the clamp as follows. If it is on the correctside, proceed to step #5. Look at the universal clamp. If

you are mounting the actuator with the “CCW” side out,position the clamp so that the pointer section of the tab is

pointing to 0°(see Fig. C) and the spline pattern of theclamp mates with spline of the actuator. Slip the clamp

over the spline. (Use the same procedure if the “CW” side isout.) If your application requires a mechanical minimumposition, read the Rotation Limitation section.

4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retaining clip.5. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position. (a)

6. Mount the spring return actuator to the shaft. Tighten the

universal clamp, finger tight only.7. Mount the anti-rotation strap at the base of the actuator.

Slip the stop of the anti-rotation strap in the slot of the baseof the actuator. The stud should be centered approximately

1/4” from the end of the slot. Do not tighten the screws.8. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting bracket

and pivot it away from the actuator.

9. Loosen the universal clamp and, making sure not to move

the damper shaft, rotate the actuator approximately 5°inthe direction which would open the damper.

10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.

11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals

(b) and re-engage the anti-rotation strap (c).12. Tighten all fasteners.

Short Shaft InstallationIf the shaft extends at least 3/4” from the duct, follow thesesteps:

1. Move damper blades to the fail-safe position (a).

2. Determine the best orientation for the universal clamp on theback of the actuator. The best location would be where you

have the easiest access to the V bolt nuts on the clamp.

3. Engage the clamp to the actuator as close as possible tothe determined location.

4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retainer clip.



Do not tighten the screws.7. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting bracket

and pivot it away from the actuator.8. Loosen the universal clamp and, making sure not to move

the damper shaft, rotate the actuator approximately 5°in

the direction which would open the damper.9. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.

10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals

(b) and re-engage the anti-rotation strap (c).

12. Tighten all fasteners.

3 0

20

1 0

0

CCW

2 0

10

0 - 5

Correct clamp mountingposition if actuator is at

full fail-safe.

4

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

3 0

2 0

10

0 - 5

Correct pointer mountingposition if actuator is atfull fail-safe.

CW

CCW CW

®

Figure B

R

5 °

M

1 2 S 1 S

2

( C O M ) (

+ )

M a d e

i n S w i t

z e r l a n

d

3 0 4 0 5 0

6 0 7 0

8 0

2 5… 8 5 °

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

1 0

0

-5

LC

M a d e i n

S w i t z

e r l a

n d

9 0

8 0

7 0 6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

10

0

- 5

b

c

a

CW

®

N F …

1/4"



37


©


N F


Rotation LimitationThe angle of rotation limiter, ZDB-AF2, is used in conjunction

with the tab on the universal clamp or IND-AF2 position indica-

tor which comes with the ZDB-AF2. In order to function prop-erly, the clamp or indicator must be mounted correctly.See Fig. A.

The ZDB-AF2 may not work in certain mounting orientationsusing the ZG-106 or ZG-107 mounting brackets. It will not work

with the ZG-108 mounting bracket. Limiting the damper rotationmust be accomplished by adjusting the crank arm linkage.

The ZDB-AF2 may be used to control the rotational output of

the NF series actuator where a damper has a designed rota-

tion less than 90°. An example would be a 45°or 60°rotatingdamper.

Damper rotation limiting1. Determine the amount of damper rotation required.2. Locate the Angle of Rotation Limiter (ZDB-AF2) on the

actuator so that its edge lines up with the degree grad-uation on the actuator face which corresponds with the

required rotation. See Fig. C.

3. Find the appropriate cross-hair location through the slotof the limiter. This is the screw mounting location.

4. Pierce through the label material to allow easy fasten-ing of the retaining screw.

5. Position the limiter back to the desired position, making

sure the locating “teeth” on the limiter are engaged intothe locating holes on the actuator.

6. Fasten the limiter to the actuator using the self tappingscrew provided.

7. Test the damper rotation before applying power and ifrequired, a control signal. Re-adjust if necessary.

Auxiliary SwitchesThe NF series actuators may be ordered with 1 built-in SPDT

auxiliary switch used for safety interfacing or signalling, for

example, for fan start-up. The switch position is adjustablebetween 5°and 85° of rotation. The crank, supplied with theactuator, or a 3mm allen wrench (NF24-S2, with 2 built-in

switches, adjustable between +25°and +85°) is used to adjust

the switching position.See Fig. D.

1 The actuator must be in its fail-safe position.

2. Insert the crank into the hexagon shaped hole located inthe center of the adjustable switch pointer.

3. Rotate the crank until the switch pointer is at the desired

switch point in degrees as shown.

®

2 0

3 0

4 0

Screw secured atthese cross hairs

2 0

3 0

4 0

Secure angle-of-rotation limiter

Screw

Philips screwdriver

2 0

3 0

4 0

Angle of rotationis now set at 40°.

Figure C ZDB-AF2 Securing the Angle of Rotation Limiter

Factory setting 5° Rotate withcrank handle 45° set

5…85°

10 2030

40

50

607080

5…85°

10 2030

40

50

607080

5…85°

10 2030

40

50

607080


Figure D



38

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Installation InstructionsNon-direct mounting methods and additional information

Initialization of the NF24-SR USWhen power is initially applied, the microprocessor recognizesthat the actuator is at full fail-safe and uses this position as

the base for all of its position calculations. The microprocessorwill retain the initialized zero during short power failures of upto 20 seconds. For power failures greater than 20 seconds the

actuator would naturally return to it full fail-safe position priorto the microprocessor losing its memory. When power is

applied again, the actuator will re-initialize the zero position.The microprocessor will keep count of these short power fail-

ures until 16 occur. At this point, the microprocessor will auto-

matically drive the actuator to its zero position and re-initializeto correct for any possible error accumulation.

Motor position detectionBelimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for potentiome-

ters for positioning. Inside the motor are three “Hall Effect” sen-

sors. These sensors detect the spinning rotor and send pulsesto the microprocessor which counts the pulses and calculatesthe position to within 1/3 of a revolution of the motor.

Overload protectionThe Belimo NF24-SR US actuator is protected from overloadat all angles of rotation. The on board microprocessor con-

stantly monitors the rotation of the DC drive motor inside theactuator and stops the pulses to the motor when it senses astall condition. The DC motor remains energized and pro-

duces full rated torque to the load. This helps ensure thatdampers are fully closed and that edge and blade seals are

always properly compressed.

Brushless DC motor operationBelimo's brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles ofstationary electromagnets housed inside rotating permanent

magnets. The electromagnetic poles are switched by a micro-processor and a special ASIC (Application Specific Integrated

Circuit) developed by Belimo. Unlike the conventional DC

motor, there are no brushes to wear or commutators to foul.

Additional Operational Information for NF24-SR US Proportional Actuators

®

Crankarm

KH-AF Non-direct mounting with ZG-108 mounting bracket

KH-AF crankarm including retaining ring. Caution: theretaining clip supplied with the clamp is not used to mount the

KH-AF crankarm.

Non-direct mounting using various accessories

The KH-AF (-1) crankarm is used in non-direct coupled

mounting applications.

Two sizes are available:

KH-AF For round shafts up to 3/4” or square shafts up to5/8”

KH-AF-1For jackshafts up to 1.05”

ZG-AFLinkageKitKH-AF

Crankarm

ZG-106 or ZG-107

DC1Damper Clip



39


©


N F


enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supplybefore attempting any wiring connections or changes. Makeall connections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow

all applicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect

and overload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment to

the actuator must be made with flexible conduit.

Always read the controller manufacturer's installation lit-

erature carefully before making any connections. Follow

all instructions in this literature. If you have any questions,

contact the controller manufacturer and/or Belimo.

Transformer(s)

The NF24 . . actuator requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draws a maximum of 8 VA per actuator. The actuator

enclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts orcomponents to be replaced or repaired.

– EMC directive: 89/336/EEC – Software class A: Mode of operation type 1

– Low voltage directive: 73/23/EEC

CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digital

controllers from a separate power transformer than that usedfor actuators or other end devices. The power supply design

in our actuators and other end devices use half wave rectifica-tion. Some controllers use full wave rectification. When these

two different types of power supplies are connected to the

same power transformer and the DC commons are connectedtogether, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes in

the full wave power supply, damaging the controller. Only usea single power transformer to power the controller and actua-

tor if you know the controller power supply uses half wave rec-tification.

Multiple actuators, one transformerMultiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-

vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is

less than or equal to the rating of the transformer.

2. Polarity on the secondary of the transformer is strictly fol-lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuators

are connected to the common leg on the transformer and all No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hot-

leg. Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformerwill result in erratic operation or failure of the actuator

and/or controls.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal maybe powered from multiple transformers provided the following

rules are followed:


to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring dia-gram page 19.

Wire length for NF… actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the lengths listed in the table in

Fig. E. If more than one actuator is powered from the same

wire run, divide the allowable wire length by the number of actu-

ators to determine the maximum run to any single actuator.Example for NF24-SR US:

3 actuators, 16 Ga wire

550 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 183 Ft. Maximum wire run



12 Ga 1100 Ft. 18 Ga 260 Ft.

14 Ga 700 Ft. 20 Ga 140 Ft.

16 Ga 440 Ft. 22 Ga 75 Ft.

Figure E

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with the

NF24… actuators. Use code-approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It is

good practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure the

splice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/or

wire-tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The NF24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that is

designed to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). In

some situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductive

load (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solve

this problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.

2. Re-route the wiring away from the source of pickup.

3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground theshield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actua-

tor common.


12 Ga 1500 Ft. 18 Ga 375 Ft.

14 Ga 925 Ft. 20 Ga 200 Ft.

16 Ga 550 Ft. 22 Ga 100 Ft.


12 Ga 1250 Ft. 18 Ga 320 Ft.

14 Ga 800 Ft. 20 Ga 160 Ft.

16 Ga 500 Ft. 22 Ga 85 Ft.



®

NF24(-S) US

NF120(-S) US / NF230(-S) US

NF24-SR(-S) US



40

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Special Wiring DiagramsNF24-SR US

4 to 20 mA control of NF24-SR US with 2 to 10 VDC feed-back output.

Minimum position control of NF24-SR US from a voltagesignal and through a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

Override closed of a NF24-SR US.

q

q

q

q

2

1

1

2

3

(–)

(+)

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

4 to 20 mA

Control Signal

2 to 10 VDC

Feedback Signal




Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With4 actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor. Power con-sumption must be observed.

The 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control sig-nal to 2…10 VDC.


1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V

NF24-SR US

Ω

500Ω

q

2

1

1

2

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

SPST

LineVolts


Override



Actuator drives to the low signal position when thereis no signal to wire 3 (SPST relay energized). Adjustreversing switch CW/CCW so the low signal posi-tions the damper in its desired end position.


1 Common

2 + Hot


Y2 Input, 0…20 V Ph.cut

5 U Output 2 to 10V

NF24-SR US

cqq

q

q

q

q

q

2

2

4

1

1

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Provide overload protectionand disconnect as required.



The 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA controlsignal to 2…10 VDC.

1 Common

2 + Hot


Y2 Input, 0…20 V Ph.cut

5 U Output 2 to 10V

NF24-SR US


SGA24SGF24

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Output

4 Control Input

3

4

4

To otheractuators

®

5

5

3

3

43

3

Override open of a NF24-SR US Both the override closedand the override open circuit can be combined on one actua-tor. Wire the relay contacts in series. Determine which signalhas the highest precedence and connect that relay electricallyclosest to the actuator.

q

q q

2

2

3

1

1

3

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Control Signal


Actuator drives to the high signal position when24VAC hot is connected to wire 3 (SPDT relay ener-

gized). Adjust Reversing Switch CW/CCW so the highsignal positions the damper to its desired position.CAUTION: Do not short 24 VAC hot to the (+) leg ofthe control signal or the controller may be damaged.


1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U 2 to 10V Output

NF24-SR US

Override “Open”

Circuit

SPDTq

c

Ω



41


©


N F

NF24-SR US

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input 0 to 10V

5 U 2 to 10V Output

Special Wiring DiagramsNF24-SR US


IMPORTANT Observe polarity on secondary oftransformers. Connect all actuator Wire 1 and

Control Signal (–) to one leg of the transformer (boldline) and all actuator Wire 2 to the other leg of thetransformer. Incorrect polarity can damage controlleror cause erratic operation.

Set reversing switch CW/CCW as required by controllogic.

When individual transformers are used for each actu-ator, the hot line from the transformer only goes toone actuator. The common wire 1 of all actuatorsmust be wired together.


2

3

4

42

1

To other

actuators

5

Parallel control of two or more actuators from a voltagesignal using either one transformer for all actuators orindividual transformers for each actuator.

q

q

q

q

q

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

Control

Signal

1 Common

2 + Hot


Ph.cut

5 U Output 2 to 10V

NF24-SR US

1

Line

Volts1 Common

2 + Hot


Ph.cut

5 U Output 2 to 10V

NF24-SR US

(–)(+)

q

q

3

®

5

5

5

Honeywell ® is a trademark of Honeywell Inc.; Barber-Colman ® is a trademark of Barber-Colman, Inc.; Johnson ® is a trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.


SGA24 (NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount)are identical electrically. Both act as a manual posi-tioner when no signal is present on terminal 4. Bothact as a minimum positioner when there is asignal on terminal 4 (output on terminal 3 is either thecontrol signal or the knob setting, whichever is higher).

Override circuits are optional. See truth table below.


q

q q

q

2

2

3

4

4

5

1

1

3

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

Control

Signal

Override

Circuit

No. 1

c

q

q

SPST

q q

23

(–)(+)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Output

4 Control Input

SGA24SGF24

Override

Circuit

No.2

c

SPDT

R1

R2

Minimum position control with override circuits of NF24-SRUS from a voltage signal and through a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

Relay R1 Relay R2 Damper PositionDe-energized De-energized Modulates - min. pos.

or control input (Note 3 above)

Energized De-energized Close (0 VDC position)

Energized Energized Close (0 VDC position)

De-energized Energized Open (max VDC position)

4



42

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Startup and CheckoutInstructions For NF24-SR US

Procedure

















NF24-SR US this is 2 to 10 VDC or

4 to 20 mA. Note: The input signal

must be above the 2 VDC or 4 mA to

have the actuator move.

Loosen the nuts on the V-bolt and

move the damper by hand from fully

closed to fully open..





Expected Response


Signal” position.



the actuator(s). Minimum volt-

age of 19.2 VAC or 21.6 VDC.


Signal” position.


tion




cate.

Damper will go from fully closed

to fully open.




Go To Step…

Actuator operates

properly

Step 8


ed, actuator begins

to drive

Step 1

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Controller output

(actuator input) is

correct. Input

Polarity Correct.

Step 6

Damper moves

properly

Step 7

Defective Actuator.

Replace Actuator -

See Note 2


Go To Step…

No response at all

Step 2Operation is

reversed


toward "Control

Signal Position"

Step 4

Power wiring

corrected, actuator

still does not drive

Step 4

Does not drive

toward “Control

Signal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Reprogram, adjust

repair or replace


Step 1

Find cause of damper

jam and repair. Move

damper back to the

fully closed position

and tighten the nuts.

Step 1


requirement and


Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.





signal negative (-).• Controllers and actuators must have separate 24 VAC/VDC power sources.


NF24-SR US Electrical check-out procedure

®



43


©


N F

Notes/Work Pad ®



44

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


LF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator ®



LF Series – at a glance


Torque: 35 in-lb q q q q q q q q q q q q

Power supply:24 VAC/DC q q q q q q q q

120 VAC q q

230 VAC q q

Control signal: on-off q q q q q q q

Control signal: floating point q q q q

Control signal: proportional 2 to 10 VDC q q

Control signal: 6 to 9 VDC

Feedback: 2 to 10 VDC q q

Auxiliary output, 20 VDC (to power controller)

Running time: motor <75 sec q q q q q q

motor 150 sec constant q q q q

motor 90 sec constant q q

spring <25 sec q q q q q q q q q q q q

External direction of rotation switch q q q q q q

Plenum rated cable, 18 GA q q q

Conduit fitting q q q q q q q q q q q q

Appliance cable q q q q q q q q q

Built-in auxiliary switch q q q q q q

Installation instructions......(p. 56–62) General wiring ..............(p. 58) Start-up and checkout......(p. 65)Actuator sizing ..................(p. 57) Special wiring ................(p. 63–64)

L F 2 4 U S (

p .

4 6 )

L F 2 4

- S U S

( p .

4 6 )

L F 1 2 0 U S

( p .

4 8 )

L F 1 2 0

- S U

S ( p

. 4 8 )

L F 2 3 0 U S

( p .

4 8 )

L F 2 3 0

- S U

S ( p

. 4 8 )

L F 2 4

- 3 U S

( p .

5 0 )

L F C 2 4

- 3 - R

U S ( p

. 5 2 )

L F C 2 4

- 3 - S

U S ( p

. 5 2 )

L F 2 4

- 3 - S U S ( p

. 5 0 )

L F 2 4

- S R U

S ( p

. 5 4 )

L F 2 4

- S R - S

U S ( p

. 5 4 )

Applications

Cost effective quality and performance

for a range of applications including:

• Classroom Unit Ventilators

• Fan/Coil Units

• VAV Terminal Units

• Economizer Units

• Airhandlers

• Control Dampers

LF… actuator

circuit board cover (removed)



45


©


L

F

LF Series Spring Return Direct Coupled Actuator ®


UL

q Cut labor costs with (10 min. installation) simple direct coupling.

Actuator Centers on 1/2” shaft. (K6-1, 3/4” clamp optional)


q Mount for clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe.

q Easy-to-adjust mechanical stop to limit damper rotation.


q Don’t worry about actuator burn-out.Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation


Do it easily with a simple switch. (modulating actuators)

q Built-in auxiliary switch is easy to use, offers feedback

or signal for additional device.


actuator life span and reliability, provides constant running

time. (modulating actuators)


mechanical room.

q 3 ft. cable and conduit connector eases installation.

A CLOSER LOOK… B e l i m

o ’ sC o m

mit m e n t t o

Q u a

l i t

y

S i n c e 19 9 1

I S O 9 0 0 1












D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


LF24 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®




iary contact, digital output, or a manual switch.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft from 3/8”

up to 1/2” in diameter by means of its universal clamp, 1/2”shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4” use K6-1

accessory. A crank arm and several mounting brackets are

available for applications where the actuator cannot be directcoupled to the damper shaft.

Operation

The LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tight


to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The LF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with a


without the need of mechanical end switches. Power con-

sumption is reduced in holding mode.

The LF24-S US version is provided with 1 built in auxiliaryswitch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or

signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 0°and 95°. The auxiliary switch in the

LF24-S is double insulated so an electrical ground connection

is not necessary.


0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]

3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]

0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]

Standard:

3/8" to 1/2"

3/8" to 7/16"

Optional

1/2" to 3/4"w/K6-1accessory

Technical Data LF24 (-S) US


24 VDC ± 10%


holding: 2.5 W



(LF24-S US has 2 cables)1/2” conduit connector


Angle of rotation max. 95°, adjust. with mechanical stop

Torque 35 in-lb [4 Nm]

Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting


return position)

Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5) @ 250 VAC, UL listedadjustable 0°to 95°(double insulated)

Running time motor: < 40 to 75 sec

spring: < 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No.24

certified, CE

Noise level max: running < 50 db (A)

spring return 62 dB (A)


Quality standard ISO 9001Weight LF24 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)

LF24-S 3.2 lbs (1.45 kg.)


UL

(LF24-S)

(nominal)

46

D 0 1 0



47


©


L

F

LF24 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 24 V

®

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)

IND-LF Damper position indicator

K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft

Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF

ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415

type actuators, and new installationsZG-LF112 Crankarm adaptor kit for Honeywell Mod IV,

M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZS-100 Weather shield (metal)


Note: When using LF24 US and LF24-S US actuators,only use accessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

LF24 (-S) US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled


of direct mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4” diameter and centera 1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they may

be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe

operation. Actuators shall be protected from overload at all

angles of rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be

provided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators

with auxiliary switch must be constructed to meet the require-

ments for Double Insulation so an electrical ground is not

required to meet agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed

and CSA certified, have a 2 year warranty, and be manufac-

tured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.

Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

2

3




2

3

1

4

5




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF24-S US incorporates a built-in auxiliaryswitch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed,adjustable 0°to 95°.


On-off wiring for LF24 US On-off wiring for LF24-S US

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

LF24 US

LineVolts 3

1 Common

2 + Hot

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

LF24-S US

Line

Volts 3

4

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95° W

0 4 7

W 0 4 8



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©






The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft from 3/8”

up to 1/2” in diameter by means of its universal clamp, 1/2”shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4” use K6-1

accessory. A crank arm and several mounting brackets are

available for applications where the actuator cannot be directcoupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close off on air tight


to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The LF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with a


without the need of mechanical end switches. Power con-

sumption is reduced in holding mode. The actuator is doubleinsulated so an electrical ground connection is not necessary.

The LF120-S US and LF230-S US versions are provided with

1 built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided forsafety interfacing or signaling, for example, for fan start-up.

The switching function is adjustable between 0°and 95°.


LF120 (-S) US / LF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120/230 VAC

Technical Data LF120 (-S) US LF230(-S) US

Power supply 120 VAC ± 10% 230 VAC ± 10%

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Power consumption running: 5.5 W 5 W

holding: 3.5 W 3 W

Transformer sizing 7.5 VA 7 VA


(-S models have 2 cables)


Overload protection electronic throughout 0 to 95°rotationElectrical protection actuators are double insulated

Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stop


Direction of rotation reversible with cw/ccw mounting

Posit ion indication visual indicator, 0°to 90°(0°is


Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(-S models) adjustable 0°to 95°

Electrical protection actuators are double insulated

Running time motor: < 40 to 75 sec

spring:< 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873, CSA C22.2 No. 24 Certified,

CE [LF230(-S) US]




Quality standard ISO 9001Weight LF120/230 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg.)

LF120/230-S 3.5 lbs (1.60 kg.)

®

(nominal)


UL

48

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]

3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]

0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]

Standard:

3/8" to 1/2"

3/8" to 7/16"

Optional


D 0 1 0



49


©


L

F

LF120 (-S) US / LF230 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, 120/230 VAC

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)

IND-LF Damper position indicator

K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaft

Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LF

ZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415type actuators, and new installations

ZG-LF112 Crankarm adaptor kit for Honeywell Mod IV,

M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZS-100 Weather shield (metal)


Note: When using LF120/230 US and LF120-S/230-S USactuators, only use accessories listed on this page.

LF120 (-S) US / LF230 (-S) US Typical SpecificationOn-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled


direct mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4” diameter and center a1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed so that they may

be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe oper-ation. Actuators shall be protected from overload at all angles

of rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be pro-vided having the capability of being adjustable. Actuators

must be constructed to meet the requirements for DoubleInsulation so an electrical ground is not required to meet

agency listings. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified,

have a 2 year warranty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001International Quality Control Standards. Actuators shall be as

manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2




2

3

1

3




For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF120-S US and LF230-S US incorporateone built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A)@250 VAC, UL listed, adjustable 0°to 95°.


®

4

5

On-off wiring for LF120 US / LF230 US On-off wiring for LF120-S US / LF230-S US

1 Neutral

2 Hot1

2

120 VAC

(230 VAC for LF230 US)

LF120 USLF230 US

3L1 N

L2 H

1 Neutral

2 Hot

2

3

4

5

5

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

LF120-S USLF230-S US

1

120 VAC(230 VAC for LF230 US)

L1 N

L2 H

W 0 4 9

W 0 5 0



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


LF24-3 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V


Application

For modulation or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the damper

manufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft from 3/8”up to 1/2” in diameter by means of its universal clamp, 1/2”

shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4” use K6-1

accessory. A crank arm and several mounting brackets areavailable for applications where the actuator cannot be direct

coupled to the damper shaft.

Control is 3 wire, floating point from a triac or relay, or on-offfrom an auxiliary contact from a fan motor contactor, con-

troller, or manual switch.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tight


to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The LF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LF24-3 (-S) US uses a brushless DC motor which is con-

trolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) and a

microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence tothe ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate. The ASIC monitors

and controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and provides adigital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actua-

tor in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in

its normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.

The LF24-3-S US version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliary

switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching function

is adjustable between 0°and 95°. The auxiliary switch in theLF24-3-S US is double insulated so an electrical ground is not

necessary.


Technical Data LF24-3 (-S) US


24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 2.5 W ; holding: 1 W


Electrical connection LF24-3 US 3 ft, plenum rated cable

LF24-3-S US 3 ft, 18 GA appliance

cables (2)






Direction of rotation spring: reversible with cw/ccw mounting


Position indication visual indicator, 0°to 90°(0°is


Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(LF24-3-S US) adjustable 0°to 95°(double insulated)


independent of load

spring: < 25 sec@-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873 listed; CSA C22.2 No. 24

certified, CE





Weight LF24-3 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)

LF24-3-S 3.6 lbs (1.45 kg.)

LISTED94D5TEMP. IND &

REG. EQUIP.

UL

®

50

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]

3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]

0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]

Standard:

3/8" to 1/2"

3/8" to 7/16"

Optional


D 0 1 0



51


©


L

F

LF24-3 (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Shaft extension (K6-1 is required)IND-LF Damper position indicator

K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaftTool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LFZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415


M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LF24-3 (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

LF24-3 (-S) US Typical SpecificationFloating point, on-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled type

which require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaft

up to a 3/4” diameter and center a 1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed sothat they may be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.

Actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to reverse control logic.Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor and be protected from overload at all

angles of rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be provided having

the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary switch must be con-structed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical ground

is not required to meet agency listings. Run time shall be constant and independ-ent of torque. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 2 year warran-

ty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.


®

12 8

324 VAC Transformer

a open

a closed



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

LF24-3 (-S) US

CW CCW

a

LineVolts

LineVolts



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

24 VAC Transformer

LF24-3 (-S) US

CW CCW

bCCWCW

stop

a(3) (4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side


x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

xx

x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW

a

b

8

Wiring Diagrams

On-Off control of LF24-3 (-S) US

Triac source

Triac sink

Floating point control of LF24-3 (-S) US

Auxiliary switch of LF24-3 (-S) US

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

ComHot

Controller

LineVolts

CW CCW

LF24-3(-S) US



1

2

24 VAC Transformer

8

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

ComHot

Controller

LineVolts

CW CCW

LF24-3(-S) US



1

2

4

5

24 VAC Transformer

8

Triac sink with separate transformers

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

ComHot

Controller

LineVolts

CW CCW

LF24-3(-S) US



1

2

5

24 VAC TransformerLineVolts


8

7LF24-3-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

2

3

4

5


Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power consumption must be observed.


The Common connection from the actuator must be connected to the Hot con-nection of the controller.

The actuator Hot must be connected to the control board Common.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., LF24-3-S USLF120-S US and LF230-S US incorporate one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 x SPDT,

6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed, adjustable 0°to 95°.Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection.

Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have numbers on wires; use colorcoded instead. Actuators with appliance rated cable use numbers.

6

7

8

Notes:

W 0 5 3

W 0 5 2

W 0 5 1

W 0 5 4

W 0 5 5

W 0 5 6



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


LFC24-3-R (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V, Trane Voyager retrofit


Application

For modulation or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the damper



shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4” use K6-1accessory. The ZG-LFC114 universal mounting kit can be

used with the LFC24-3-R US actuator for retrofit of the econo-mizer section of the Trane Voyager unit.

Control is 3 wire, floating point from a triac or relay, or on-offfrom an auxiliary contact from a fan motor contactor, con-

troller, or manual switch.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tight

dampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The LF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with a

graduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LFC24-3-R (-S) US uses a brushless DC motor which is

controlled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) anda microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelligence

to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate. The ASIC moni-

tors and controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and providesa digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actua-

tor in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere inits normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.

Power consumption is reduced in holding mode.

The LFC24-3-S US version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliary

switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing orsignaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching function

is adjustable between 0°and 95°. The auxiliary switch in theLFC24-3-S US is double insulated so an electrical ground is

not necessary.


Technical Data LFC24-3-R US


24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption running: 2.5 W ; holding: 1 W


Electrical connection LFC24-3-R US 3 ft, plenum rated

cable 4 male spade connectors





Direction of rotation spring: reversible with cw/ccw mounting



return position)


independent of load

spring: < 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873 listed; CSA C22.2 No.24 certified, CE





Weight LFC24-3-R US 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)

Technical Data LFC24-3-S US

Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listedadjustable 0°to 95°(double insulated)

Electrical Connection 3 ft, 18 GA appliance cables (2)1/2” conduit connector

Weight LFC24-3-S US 3.6 lbs (1.45 kg.)


UL

®

52

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]

3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]

0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]

Standard:

3/8" to 1/2"

3/8" to 7/16"

Optional


D 0 1 0



53


©


L

F

LFC24-3-R (-S) USOn-off, spring return safety, reversible, floating point, 24V, Trane Voyager retrofit


K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaftTool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LFZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415


M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZG-LFC114 Used with LFC24-3-R US, mounting bracket kit for

Trane Voyager economizer actuator retrofit. Kitincludes mounting bracket and installation hardware.

ZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LFC24-3-R (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

Note: For On-Off control wiring please see LF24-3 USwiring diagram. “On-Off control of LF24-3 (-S) US” page 9.

Note: For Floating point control wiring, Triac source, sinkor wiring with separate power supplies please see page 9for correct wiring.

Note: Please consult controller manufacturers documenta-tion to ensure compatibility. If you are unsure send con-troller specifications to Belimo Aircontrols for evaluation.

LFC24-3-R (-S) US Typical SpecificationFloating point, on-off spring return damper actuators shall be direct coupled typewhich require no crankarm and linkage and be capable of direct mounting to a shaft

up to a 3/4” diameter and center a 1/2” shaft. The actuators must be designed sothat they may be used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe operation.

Actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to reverse control logic.

Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor and be protected from overload at allangles of rotation. If required, 1 SPDT auxiliary switch shall be provided having

the capability of being adjustable. Actuators with auxiliary switch must be con-

structed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an electrical groundis not required to meet agency listings. Run time shall be constant and independ-

ent of torque. Actuators shall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 2 year warran-

ty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control Standards.Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

®

LineVolts



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

24 VAC Transformer

LFC24-3-R US

LFC24-3-S US

CW CCW

bCCWCW

stop

a(3) (4)

stop stop stop

Installation Side


x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

xx

x

x x

x x

x x x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

CWCCWSwitch

Positions

CCWCW

a

b

Wiring Diagrams

Floating point control of LF24-3… US

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

Grn (4) +

LFC24-3-R US

CW CCW

Pink

Red

Blue

Yellow

Yellow

Pink

Female

Connector Type

Equipment

Wiring

Field installed

female connectors

(provided)

Pre-installed

male connectors

on actuators

Male

Pink Pink

Pink Pink

Blue Blue

7LFC24-3-S US

6S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

Auxiliary switch of LFC24-3-S US

2

3

1Provide overloadprotection anddisconnect as required.

Actuators may beconnected in parallel.Power consumptionmust be observed.

No ground connectionis required.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup, etc., LFC24-3-S US,

LF120-S US and LF230-S US incorporate one built-in auxiliary switch: 1 xSPDT, 6A (1.5A) @250 VAC, UL listed, adjustable 0°to 95°.

Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need of an electricalground connection.

6

7

Notes:

ZG-LFC114

Wiring LFC24-3-R US

Retrofit solution installation

W

1 4 7

W 1 4 8

W 1 4 9



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications.


shaft centered at delivery. For shafts up to 3/4” use K6-1

accessory. A crank arm and several mounting brackets areavailable for applications where the actuator cannot be direct

coupled to the damper shaft.

The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from anelectronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal

is provided for position indication or master-slave applications.

OperationThe LF series actuators provide true spring return operation forreliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torqueto the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.The LF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with agraduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LF24-SR (-S) US uses a brushless DC motor which iscontrolled by an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)and a microprocessor. The microprocessor provides the intelli-gence to the ASIC to provide a constant rotation rate and toknow the actuator’s exact fail-safe position. The ASIC moni-

tors and controls the brushless DC motor’s rotation and pro-vides a digital rotation sensing function to prevent damage tothe actuator in a stall condition. The actuator may be stalledanywhere in its normal rotation without the need of mechani-cal end switches. Power consumption is reduced in holdingmode.

The LF24-SR-S US version is provided with 1 built-in auxiliary

switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or

signaling, for example, for fan start-up. The switching functionis adjustable between 0°and 95°. The auxiliary switch in the

LF24-SR-S US is double insulated so an electrical ground innot necessary.


LF24-SR (-S) USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication.

Technical Data LF24-SR (-S) US


Power consumption running: 2.5 W; holding: 1 W


Electrical connection LF24-SR US 3 ft, plenum rated cable

LF24-SR-SUS 3 ft, 18 GA appliance

cables (2)



Operating Range 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20mA





Direction of rotation spring return reversible with

cw/ccw mounting

control direction selected by switch:

CW=CW with a decrease in signal

CCW=CCW with a decrease in signal

Position indication visual indicator, 0°to 95°

(0°is spring return position)

Auxiliary switch 1 x SPDT 6A (1.5A) @ 250 VAC, UL listed(LF24-SR-SUS) adjustable 0°to 95°(double insulated)


independent of loadspring:< 25 sec @-4°F to +122°F [-20°C to +50°C]

< 60 sec @-22°F [-30°C]






Agency listings UL 873 listed; CSA C22.2 No. 24 certified, CE





Weight LF24-SR 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)

LF24-SR-S 3.2 lbs (1.45 kg.)


UL

®

(nominal)

0.39" [10]

7.67" [195]

3.66" [93]

1.93"[49]

6.10" [155]

3.15" [80]

3.86"[98]

0.256" [6.5]

0.98"[25]

4.92" [125]

0.79"[20]

0.5"[12.7]

0.71" [18]

0.74" [18.7]

2.24"[57]

3.23" [82]

0.25" [6.3]

Standard:

3/8" to 1/2"

3/8" to 7/16"

Optional


D 0 1 0

54



55


©


L

F

2 to 10 VDC control of LF24-SR (-S) US

LF24-SR (-S) USProportional damper actuator, spring return safety, 24 V for 2 to 10 VDC, or 2 to 20 mA control signal.Output signal of 2 to 10 VDC for position indication.


K6-1 Universal clamp for up to 3/4” diameter shaftsKH-LF Crankarm for up to 1/2” round shaftSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housingSGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountingTool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-LF2 Crankarm adaptor kit for LFZG-112 Mounting bracket for Honeywell Mod IV, M6415


M6415 type actuators, and new installationsZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signalZS-100 Weather shield (metal)ZS-150 Weather shield (polycarbonate)ZS-260 Explosion-proof housing

Note: When using LF24-SR (-S) US actuators, only useaccessories listed on this page.

LF24-SR (-S) US Typical SpecificationSpring return control damper actuators shall be direct coupled


direct mounting to a shaft up to a 3/4” diameter and center a 1/2”shaft. The actuator must provide proportional damper control in

response to a 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a 500Ω

resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from an electronic controller

or positioner.The actuators must be designed so that they maybe used for either clockwise or counterclockwise fail-safe opera-

tion. Actuators shall use a brushless DC motor controlled by amicroprocessor and be protected from overload at all angles of

rotation. Run time shall be constant, and independent of torque.

A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided for positionfeedback or master-slave applications. If required, 1 SPDT aux-

iliary switch shall be provided having the capability of beingadjustable. Actuators with auxiliary switch must be construct-

ed to meet the requirements for Double Insulation so an elec-

trical ground is not required to meet agency listings. Actuatorsshall be UL listed and CSA certified, have a 2 year warranty, and

be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality ControlStandards. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2

1

2

1




Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have num-bers on wires; use color codes instead.

The LF24-SR-S US wire 5 is white.

3

4

®

2




A 500Ω resistor converts the 4…20 mA control signalto 2 to 10 VDC. (ZG-R01)

Only connect common to neg. (—) leg of control circuits.

Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have num-bers on wires; use color codes instead.

4

5

6

3

4 to 20 mA control of LF24-SR (-S) US with 2 to 10 VDCfeedback output

Auxiliary switch of LF24-SR-S US

For end position indication, interlock control, fan start-up, etc., LF24-SR-S US incorporates one built-in aux-iliary switch: 1 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A ) @250 VAC, ULlisted, adjustable 0° to 95°.

Meets UL & CSA requirements without the need of anelectrical ground connection.

5

1

1 4

5

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input, 2 to 10V

Grn (5) U Output, 2 to 10V

LF24-SR US

LineVolts

2 to 10 VDC

Control Signal (–)(+)

CW CCW

2LF24-SR-S US

1S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

4

To otheractuators

6

3

5

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Grn (5) U Output, 2 to 10V

4 to 20 mAControl Signal

(–)(+)

2 to 10 VDCFeedback Signal

(–)(+)

Ω

500Ω

2

LF24-SR US

CW CCW

1

Line

Volts

1

W 0 5 7

W 0 5 8

W 0 5 9



56

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Quick-Mount Visual Instructions

min 3 1/2”[90]

min 3 1/2”[90]

min 3/4”[20]

IND-LF Position Indicator(optional)

min 3/4”[20]


1. Rotate the damper to its failsafe position. If the shaft rotatescounterclockwise, mount the “CCW” side of the actuator out.If it rotates clockwise, mount the actuator with the “CW” sideout.

2. If the universal clamp is not on the correct side of the actua-tor, move it to the correct side.


4. Slide the anti-rotation strap under the actuator so that itengages the slot at the base of the actuator. Secure the

strap to the duct work with #8 self-tapping screws.

NOTE: Read the “Standard Mounting” instructions, on page 17,for more detailed information.

m i n 3 1 / 2 ” [ 9 0 ]

m i n 3 / 4 ” [ 2 0 ]

®

StandardMounting

Short ShaftMounting




57


©


L

F

Actuator Sizing ®

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is to

be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. (See Belimo Mechanical Accessories Doc. 5.2)2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and

service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft.

3. For standard mounting, the damper shaft must extend at least 3 1/2" from the duct. If the shaftextends less than 3 1/2", the actuator may be mounted in its short shaft configuration. If an

obstruction blocks access, the shaft can be extended with the AV 10-18 shaft extension. (K6-1is required)

Basic Formula

Consult the damper manufacturer for rated torque loading. Call your Belimo representative for help in determining torque loading

with linkage applications.


(6 ft2) x (4 in-lb/ft2) = (24 in-lb) Belimo LF/LM 35 in-lb

When rated loading of damper is not available:The following general selection guide may be used when it is not possible to obtain the damper manufacturer’s rated torque load-ing. Note multiplier for face velocity (feet per minute, FPM).

Damper TypeTorque Loading in-lb/ft2

< 1000 FPM/2 in w.g. 1000-2500 FPM/3 in w.g. (x 1.5) 2500-3000 FPM/4 in w.g. (x 2.0)

Air-tight applicationRound blade/edge seals 10 15 20


Normal close-off applicationRound blade/metal seat 5 7.5 10

Parallel blade/no edge seals 4 6 8Opposed blade/no edge seals 3 4.5 6

Duct Diameter (inches) Area (square feet)

4” .09

5” .19

6” .20

7” .278” .35

9” .44


10” .55

11” .66

12” .79

14” 1.0716” 1.40

18” 1.77

Formula for conversion of duct diameter area: A = π r2

144

CONVERSION OF DUCT DIAMETER AREA

(π = 3.14, r = radius)



58

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supplybefore attempting any wiring connections or changes. Make

all connections in accordance with wiring diagrams and followall applicable local and national codes. Provide disconnectand overload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment tothe actuator must be made with flexible conduit.

Always read the controller manufacturer's installation literature carefully before making any connections. Followall instructions in this literature. If you have any questions,contact the controller manufacturer and/or Belimo.

Transformer(s)The LF24 . . actuator requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draws a maximum of 7 VA per actuator. The actuatorenclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts or

components to be replaced or repaired. – EMC directive: 89/336/EEC – Software class A: Mode of operation type 1 – Low voltage directive: 73/23/EEC

CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digitalcontrollers from a separate power transformer than that usedfor actuators or other end devices. The power supply designin our actuators and other end devices use half wave rectifica-tion. Some controllers use full wave rectification. When thesetwo different types of power supplies are connected to thesame power transformer and the DC commons are connectedtogether, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes inthe full wave power supply, damaging the controller. Only use

a single power transformer to power the controller and actua-tor if you know the controller power supply uses half wave rec-tification.

Multiple actuators, one transformerMultiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is

less than or equal to the rating of the transformer.2. Polarity on the secondary of the transformer is strictly fol-

lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuators are connected to the common leg on the transformer and all No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hotleg. Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformerwill result in erratic operation or failure of the actuator

and/or controls.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal maybe powered from multiple transformers provided the followingrules are followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied

to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring diagram.

Wire length for LF… actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the lengths listed in the table inFig. A. If more than one actuator is powered from the samewire run, divide the allowable wire length by the number of actu-ators to determine the maximum run to any single actuator.

Example for LF24-SR US:3 actuators, 16 Ga wire550 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 183 Ft. Maximum wire run


Wire Size Max. Feet. Wire Size Max. Feet12 Ga 1100 Ft. 18 Ga 260 Ft.

14 Ga 700 Ft. 20 Ga 140 Ft.

16 Ga 440 Ft. 22 Ga 75 Ft.

Fig. A

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theLF24… actuators. Use code-approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuator

to the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire-tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The LF24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that isdesigned to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solvethis problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Re-route the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the

shield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actua-tor common.

Brushless DC motor operationBelimo's brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles ofstationary electromagnets housed inside rotating permanentmagnets. The electromagnetic poles are switched by a micro-processor and a special ASIC (Application Specific IntegratedCircuit) developed by Belimo. Unlike the conventional DCmotor, there are no brushes to wear or commutators to foul.


12 Ga 1500 Ft. 18 Ga 375 Ft.

14 Ga 925 Ft. 20 Ga 200 Ft.

16 Ga 550 Ft. 22 Ga 100 Ft.

General Wiring®

LF24(-S) US

LF120(-S) US / LF230(-S) US

LF24-SR(-S) US / LF24-3(-S) US / LFC24-3-R(-S) US


12 Ga 1250 Ft. 18 Ga 320 Ft.

14 Ga 800 Ft. 20 Ga 160 Ft.

16 Ga 500 Ft. 22 Ga 85 Ft.



59


©


L

F

1. See Fig. B. Manually move the damper to the fail-safe

position (a) (usually closed). If the shaft rotated counter-

clockwise ( ), this is a CCW installation. If the shaftrotated clockwise ( ), this is a CW installation. In a

Left Hand installation, the actuator side marked “CW”faces out, while in a CW installation, the side marked

“CCW” faces out. All other steps are identical.

2. The actuator is usually shipped with the universal clampmounted to the “CW” side of the actuator. To test for

adequate shaft length, slide the actuator over the shaftwith the side marked “CW” (or the “CCW” side if this is the

side with the clamp). If the shaft extends at least 1/8”through the clamp, mount the actuator as follows. If not,

go to the Short Shaft Installation section.

3. If the clamp is not on the correct side as determinedin step #1, re-mount the clamp as follows. If it is on the

correct side, proceed to step #5. Look at the universalclamp. If you are mounting the actuator with the “CCW”

side out, position the clamp so that the pointer section of

the tab is pointing to 0°(see Fig. C) and the spline patternof the clamp mates with spline of the actuator. Slip the

clamp over the spline. (Use the same procedure if the“CW” side is out.)

4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retaining clip.5. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position. (a)



Do not tighten the screws.8. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting

bracket and pivot it away from the actuator.

9. Loosen the universal clamp and, making sure not to movethe damper shaft, rotate the actuator approximately 5°in

the direction which would open the damper.10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.

11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals(b) and re-engage the anti-rotation strap (c).

12. Tighten all fasteners.

Installation ®

Standard Mounting / Airtight Damper Procedure


The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 1/2” in diameter by means of its universal clamp, or up to a 3/4” shaft with

the optional K6-1 clamp. A crank arm and several mounting brackets are available for applications where the actuator cannot bedirect coupled to the damper shaft.

The LF series actuators provide true spring return operation for reliable fail-safe application and positive close-off on air tightdampers. The spring return system provides consistent torque to the damper with, and without, power applied to the actuator.

The LF series provides 95°of rotation and is provided with a graduated position indicator showing 0 to 90°.

The LF…-S versions are provided with 1 built-in auxiliary switch. This SPDT switch is provided for safety interfacing or signaling, forexample, for fan start-up. The switching function is adjustable between 0° and 95°.

UniversalClamp

0

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

Fig. BFig. C

04567

89

LC

b

c

a

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

CW

0

®

Standard

Mounting

StandardMounting

min 3 1/2”

[90]



60

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


If the shaft extends at least 3/4” from the duct, follow these

steps:

1. (See Fig. D) Move damper blades to the fail-safe position (a).2. Determine the best orientation for the universal clamp on the

back of the actuator. The best location would be where youhave the easiest access to the V bolt nuts on the clamp.

3. Engage the clamp to the actuator as close as possible to

the determined location.4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retainer clip.

5. Mount the spring return actuator to the shaft. Tighten theuniversal clamp, finger tight only.

6. Mount the anti-rotation strap at the base of the actuator.Do not tighten the screws.

7. Remove the screw from one end of the mounting bracket

and pivot it away from the actuator.

8. Loosen the universal clamp and, making sure not to move

the damper shaft, rotate the actuator approximately 5°in

the direction which would open the damper.9. Verify that the damper is still in its full fail-safe position.

10. Tighten the universal clamp to the shaft.11. Rotate the actuator to apply pressure to the damper seals

(b) and re-engage the anti-rotation strap (c).

12. Tighten all fasteners.13. Use IND-LF accessory if position indication is needed.

Installation ®

Short Shaft Mounting with IND-LF Position Indicator / Airtight Damper Procedure

Initialization of the LF24-SR (-S) USWhen power is applied, the internal microprocessor recog-

nizes that the actuator is at its full fail-safe position anduses this position as the base for all of its position calcula-

tions. This procedure takes approximately 15 seconds.During this time you will see no response at the actuator.

The microprocessor will retain the initialized zero duringshort power failures of up to 25 seconds. When power is

applied during this period, the actuator will return to normal

operation and proceed to the position corresponding to theinput signal provided. For power failures over 25 seconds,

the actuator will be at it fail-safe position and will go throughthe start up initialization again.

Motor position detection (LF24-SR (-S) US only)Belimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for poten-

tiometers for positioning. Inside the motor are three “HallEffect” sensors. These sensors detect the spinning rotor

and send pulses to the microprocessor which counts the

pulses and calculates the position to within 1/3 of a revolu-

tion of the motor.

Overload protectionThe LF, on-off actuators are electronically protected againstoverload. The LF, On-off actuator have an internal current lim-

iter which maintains the current at a safe level which will not

damage the actuator while providing adequate holding torque.

The LF24, modulating, actuators (LF24-SR (-S) US, LF24-3US) are protected against overload by digital technology

located in the ASIC. The ASIC circuitry constantly monitorsthe rotation of the brushless DC motor inside the actuator

and stops the pulsing to the motor when it senses a stall con-

dition. The motor remains energized and produces full ratedtorque during stall conditions. The actuator will try to move in

the direction of the stall every 2 minutes, for a period of 32minutes. After this, the actuator will try again every 2 hours.

Operational Information for LF24-SR (-S) US Proportional Actuators

min 3/4”[20]


Fig. D

04567

89

LC

b

c

a

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

CW

0

®

Short ShaftMounting

Short ShaftMounting



61


©


L

F

The LF actuators are provided with an adjustable stop to limit

the rotation of the actuator. This function works in conjunctionwith the universal clamp or the optional position indicator.

The adjustable stop is needed when rotation of less than 95°is required. The LF actuator can be indefinitely stalled, in any

position, without harming the actuator.

Using the universal clamp:

1. Loosen the end stop fastening screw using a #2 Phillipsscrewdriver.

2. Move the stop block so the bottom edge of the block linesup with the number corresponding to the desired degrees

of rotation. (example: 45 degrees of rotation = .5)

3. Lock the block in place with the fastening screw.4. Check the actuator for proper rotation.

Using the IND-LF position indicator with adjustable stop:Note: preferred method if short shaft mounting is used.1. With the actuator in its fail-safe position, place the IND-LF

Position Indicator so that it points to the 0 degree position.

2. Loosen the end stop fastening screw using a #2 Phillipsscrewdriver.

3. Move the stop block so the bottom edge of the block linesup with the number corresponding to the desired degrees

of rotation. (example: 45 degrees of rotation = .5)

4. Lock the block in place with the fastening screw.5. Check the actuator for proper rotation.

0

.2

.4

.6

.8

1

Mechanical Angle of Rotation Limiting

Installation ®

LF24-SR US actuators have built-in brushless DC motors which provide better accuracy and longer service life.

The LF24-SR US actuators are designed with a unique non-symmetrical deadband. The actuator follows an increasing ordecreasing control signal with a 80 mV resolution. If the signal changes in the opposite direction, the actuator will not responduntil the control signal changes by 200 mV. This allows these actuators to track even the slightest deviation very accurately,

yet allowing the actuator to “wait” for a much larger change in control signal due to control signal instability.

Control Accuracy and Stability

SatisfiedControl Position


MinimumControl Resolution

Minimum ReversedControl Deadband

Prior to Normal Control

80 mV

200 mV

LF Actuator responds to a 80 mV signal whennot changing direction from stop position.

LF Actuator responds to a 200 mV signal whenreversing direction from stop position.

LF24-3 (-S) US and LF24-SR (-S) US actuators have a direction of

rotation switch on the cover labeled “CW-CCW”. Switch positionindicates start point. For the LF24-SR, with the switch in position

“CW”, the actuator rotates clockwise with a decrease in voltage orcurrent. With the switch in position “CCW”, the actuator rotates

counterclockwise with a decrease in voltage or current.

The LF24-3 (-S) US and LF24-SR (-S) US actuators rotate clock-

wise when the switch is in the “CW” position and power is appliedto wire #3. When power is applied to wire #4 the actuator rotates

counter clockwise.

Rotating the direction of rotation switch to “CCW” reverses the

control logic.

During checkout, the switch position can be temporarily reversed and the actuator will reverse its direction. This allows

the technician a fast and easy way to check the actuator oper-

ation without having to switch wires or change settings on the controller. When the check-out is complete, make sure the

switch is placed back to its original position.




62

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Installation®

The …-S model actuators are equipped with an adjustable

auxiliary switch used to indicate damper position or to inter-face additional controls or equipment. Switching positions can

be set over the full 0 to 95°rotation simply by setting a switchon the actuator.

1. Set desired switch position. (Example 60%)

2. As the actuator rotates, the switch indicator moves from .6(60%) toward 0 (0%). When the indicator passes 0 the

switch contact between S1 and S2 is broken and the con-

tact between S1 and S3 is made.

Auxiliary Switches

.8

.6

.4

.20

1

S1

S2

S3

S1

S2

S3

Non-direct Mounting Methods

KH-LF crankarm including retaining ring.

KH-LF

For shafts up to 1/2”

ZG-112

(pushrod not supplied with kit)

KG6 ball joint and

universal crankarm(not included)

KG6 ball joint(not included)

KH-LF

crankarm

KH-LFcrankarm

ZG-LF2Crankarm adaptor kit

ZG-LF112Crankarm adaptor kit

Voltage Resistive load Inductive load

120 VAC 6 A 3 A

250 VAC 6 A 1.5 A

Switch Rating



63


©


L

F

Special Wiring DiagramsLF24-SR US

4 to 20 mA control of LF24-SR (-S) US with 2 to 10 VDCfeedback output.

Minimum position control of LF24-SR (-S) US from a volt-age signal and through a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

Override closed of a LF24-SR (-S) US.

q

q

q

q

2

1

1

2

3

(–)

(+)

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

4 to 20 mA

Control Signal

2 to 10 VDC

Feedback Signal







Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have num-bers on wires; use color codes instead

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y1 Input, 2 to 10 V

Grn (5) U Output 2 to 10V

LF24-SR (-S) US

Ω

500Ω

q

2

1

1

2

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

SPST

Line

Volts


Override



Actuator drives to the low signal position when thereis no signal to wire 3 (SPST relay energized). Adjustreversing switch so the low signal positions thedamper in its desired end position.



LF24-SR (-S) US

c

qq

q

q

q

2

2

1

1

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts




Actuators with plenum rated cable do not have num-

bers on wires; use color codes instead

LF24-SR (-S) US


SGA24SGF24

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Output4 Control Input

3

4

4

To otheractuators

®

5

5

6

6

3

3

4

4

3

4

4

3

Override open of a LF24-SR (-S) US Both the overrideclosed and the override open circuit can be combined on oneactuator. Wire the relay contacts in series. Determine whichsignal has the highest precedence and connect that relay elec-trically closest to the actuator.

q

q q

2

2

3

4

41

1

3

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Control Signal


Actuator drives to the high signal position when 24VAChot is connected to wire 3 (SPDT relay energized).Adjust Reversing Switch so the high signal positions

the damper to its desired position.CAUTION: Do not short 24 VAC hot to the (+) leg ofthe control signal or the controller may be damaged.



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LF24-SR (-S) US

Override “Open”

Circuit

c

SPDTq

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Grn (5) U Output 2 to 10VBlk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot





64

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


LF24-SR (-S) US

Special Wiring DiagramsLF24-SR (-S) US


IMPORTANT Observe polarity on secondary oftransformers. Connect all actuator Wire 1 and

Control Signal (–) to one leg of the transformer (boldline) and all actuator Wire 2 to the other leg of thetransformer. Incorrect polarity can damage controlleror cause erratic operation.

Set reversing switch as required by control logic.

When individual transformers are used for each actu-ator, the hot line from the transformer only goes toone actuator. The common wire 1 of all actuatorsmust be wired together.



2

3

4

42

1

To other

actuators

5


q

q

q

q

q

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

Control

Signal

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LF24-SR (-S) US

1

Line

VoltsBlk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LF24-SR (-S) US

(–)(+)

q

q

3

®

5

5

5

6

6

Honeywell ® is a trademark of Honeywell Inc.; Barber-Colman ® is a trademark of Barber-Colman, Inc.; Johnson ® is a trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.


SGA24 (NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount)are identical electrically. Both act as a manual posi-tioner when no signal is present on terminal 4. Bothact as a minimum positioner when there is asignal on terminal 4 (output on terminal 3 is either thecontrol signal or the knob setting, whichever is higher).




q

q q

q

2

2

3

4

4

5

5

1

1

3

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

Control

Signal

Override

Circuit

No. 1

c

q

q

SPST

q q

23

(–)(+)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Output

4 Control Input

SGA24SGF24

Override

Circuit

No.2

c

SPDT

R1

R2

Minimum position control with override circuits ofLF24-SR (-S) US from a voltage signal and through aSGA24/SGF24 positioner.




Energized Energized Close (0 VDC position)De-energized Energized Open (max VDC position)

4

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Grn (5) U Output 2 to 10 V



65


©


L

F

®

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For LF24-SR (-S) US

Procedure

Remove power to reset actuator.Re-apply power.

Apply control signal to actuator.
















LF24-SR US this is 2 to 10 VDC or

4 to 20 mA. Note: The input signal

must be above the 2 VDC or 4 mA to

have the actuator move.

Loosen the nuts on the V-bolt and


closed to fully open.





Expected Response

Actuator will move to its “ControlSignal” position.






Signal” position.


tion

Input voltage or current should be

±1% of what controller's adjust-

ment or programming indicate.


to fully open.




Go To Step…

Actuator operatesproperly

Step 8


ed, actuator begins

to drive

Step 1

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Controller output

(actuator input) is

correct. Input

Polarity Correct.

Step 6

Damper moves

properly

Step 7

Defective Actuator.

Replace Actuator -

See Note 2


Go To Step…

No response at all

Step 2Operation is

reversed


toward "Control

Signal Position"

Step 4

Power wiring

corrected, actuator


Step 4

Does not drive

toward “Control

Signal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Reprogram, adjust

repair or replace


Step 1

Find cause of damper

jam and repair. Move

damper back to the

fully closed position

and tighten the nuts.

Step 1


requirement and


Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.








LF24-SR (-S) US Electrical check-out procedure



66

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Applications

Actuator ismounted tovortex frame.and directcoupled tolinkage shaft.

Linkage is part of inletvane assembly suppliedby manufacturer.

GM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®

Minimum 320 in-lb torque**


Torque: 320 in-lb 266 in-lb 320 in-lb

Power supply : 24 VAC q q q

Control signal: on-off q

Control signal: proportional 2 to 10 VDC q q†

Feedback signal: 2 to 10 VDC q q†

Running time 135 sec constant q q q†

External direction of rotation switch q q q

18 GA appliance cable q q q

Installation instructions ......(p. 72–76) General wiring ..............(p. 74) Start-up and checkout......(p. 79)Actuator sizing ..................(p. 73) Special wiring ................(p. 77–78)

GM Series – at a glance

* 4 in-lb/ft2 damper torque loading. Parallel blade. No edge seals. 320 in-lb of actuator torque.**GM24-SR US Only is 266 in-lb†Variable: Refer to Multi-Function Product Documentation for details.

For large damper areas and inlet guide vanes.

G M

2 4 U S

( p . 6

8 )

G M

2 4 - S R

U S

( p . 7

0 )

G M

2 4 - M F T

U S



67


©


G M

A CLOSER LOOK…

GM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®


UL

q Cut labor costs with simple direct coupling

– The Belimo Concept.

q Check damper position easily with clear indicator.


Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation

q Easy mechanical stop to adjust angle

of rotation. (add ZDB-GM accessory).

q Push-button manual override speeds installation.


Do it easily with a simple switch.

q Microprocessor-controlled brushless DC motor

increases actuator life span and reliability,provides constant running time.

q Rugged NEMA 2 housing provides protection

from splashing water.

q 3 ft. appliance cable and conduit connector

eases installation.

B e l i m

o ’ sC o m

mit m e n t t o

Q u a

l i t y

S i n c e 19 9 1

I S O 9 0 0 1













D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


GM24 USOn-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, tri-state, 24 V

®


Application:For modulating or on-off control of dampers in HVAC systems.


iary contact of a fan motor contactor, or a manual switch. Thedirection of rotation is reversible, for use with a floating point

type control. The actuator mounts directly to the damper

operating shaft with a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuator will prevent lat-

eral movement of the actuator. The angle of rotation is mechan-

ically limited to 95°. When reaching the damper or actuator endposition, the motor stops automatically. The gears can be man-

ually disengaged by simply pressing down the spring loaded but-ton on the actuator cover. When this button is pressed down,

the damper blades can be adjusted by hand. The position of theactuator is indicated by means of a scale reading 0 to 1.

The GM uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by anApplication Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC moni-

tors and controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digitalrotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in a

stall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its

normal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.


2.12"[54]

1.02" [26]

3.15"[80]

4.88"[124]

1 . 1

8 " [ 3 0 ]

8.43" [214]

9.49" [241]

15/32" to 3/4" [12 to 20]

3/8" to 5/8" [9 to 16]

Technical Data GM24 US


24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption 3 W







starting in June 2002

Direction of rotation reversible with switch A/B

Position indication 0 to 1 and reversible indicator

Running time 135 sec. independent of load




Housing NEMA type 2

Housing rating UL94V-0 (flammability rating)

Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA C22.2 No.24 certified, CE






UL

68

D 0 0 6



69


©


G M

GM24 USOn-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, tri-state, 24 V

®

AccessoriesKH8 Universal crankarmKG10 Ball joint

NSV24 Battery back-up moduleP… Feedback potentiometer

SZS Mid-position switchS1,S2 Auxiliary switch

Tool-01 10mm wrench

ZDB-GM Angle of rotation limiter (Series 2)ZG-H2 Actuator operator handle

ZG-GM2 Crankarm adaptor kitZG-100 Universal mounting bracket



ZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shield (metal)



NOTE: When using GM24 US actuators, use only theaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

GM24 US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled

type which require no crankarm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL listed and CSA certified, have a 2 year warranty, and

be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control

Standards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manual

override on the cover. Actuators shall use a brushless DC

motor and be protected from overload at all angles of rotation.

Run time shall be constant and independent of torque.


On-Off control of GM24 US



Tri-State control of GM24 US


Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC.2 2

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

a opena closed

The indication of direc-tion is valid for switch position A.

1 Common

2 +

3 +

A

B

GM24 US

LineVolts

a

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

The indication of direc-tion is valid for switch position A.

1 Common2 +

3 +

A

B

GM24 US

LineVolts

W 0 7 0

W 0 7 1

Multiple actuators mounted to shaft

Model Maximum quantity per shaft

GM24 US 2

GM24-SR US 2



D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


®


Application:

For proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the damper


The actuator mounts directly to the damper operating shaft

with a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or, with

the addition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input

from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDCfeedback signal is provided for position indication or master-

slave applications.

The anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuator will prevent lat-eral movement of the actuator. The angle of rotation is mechan-

ically limited to 95°. When reaching the damper or actuator end

position, the motor stops automatically. The gears can be man-ually disengaged by simply pressing down the spring loaded but-

ton on the actuator cover. When this button is pressed down,the damper blades can be adjusted by hand. The position of the

actuator is indicated by means of a scale reading 0 to 1.

The GM uses a brushless DC motor which is controlled by an

Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC moni-tors and controls the actuator’s rotation and provides a digital

rotation sensing function to prevent damage to the actuator in astall condition. The actuator may be stalled anywhere in its nor-

mal rotation without the need of mechanical end switches.


Technical Data GM24-SR US


24 VDC ±10%








Feedback output “U” 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max


Torque min 266 in-lb [30 Nm]

Direction of rotation reversible with switch A/B

A = CW with an increase in voltageB = CCW with an increase in voltage

Position indication 0 to 1 and reversible indicator

Running time 135 sec. independent of load

Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing



Housing NEMA type 2








UL

GM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V for 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA control signal.

70

2.12"[54]

1.02" [26]

3.15"[80]

4.88"[124]

1 . 1

8 " [ 3 0 ]

8.43" [214]

9.49" [241]

15/32" to 3/4" [12 to 20]

3/8" to 5/8" [9 to 16]

D 0 1 2



71


©


G M

®

AccessoriesIRM-100 Input scaling moduleKH8 Universal crankarm

KG10 Ball JointNSV24 Battery back-up module

P… Feedback potentiometerPTA-250 Pulse width modulation interface

SGA24 Min. and/or manual positioner in NEMA 4 housing

SGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mountS1,S2 Auxiliary switch

Tool-01 10mm wrenchZAD24 Digital posit ion indication

ZDB-GM Angle of rotation limiter (Series 2)

ZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZG-GM2 Crankarm adaptor kit

ZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 4 to 20 mAZG-100 Universal mounting bracket

ZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracket


ZG-104 Universal mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shield (metal)



NOTE: When using GM24-SR US actuators, use only theaccessories listed on this page.

Wiring diagrams

GM24-SR US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled

type which require no crankarm and linkage. Actuators shallbe UL listed and CSA certified, have a 2 year warranty, and

be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control

Standards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and gear

disengagement button on the cover. Actuators shall use a

brushless DC motor and be protected from overload at all

angles of rotation. Run time shall be constant and independ-

ent of torque. The actuator must provide proportional damper

control in response to a 2 to 10 VDC or, with the addition of a

500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from an electronic

controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall

be provided for position indication or master-slave applica-

tions. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

2



4 to 20 mA control of GM24-SR US with 2 to 10 VDC feed-back output.

0 to 10 VDC control of GM24-SR US

2

1

3


Connect actuator common (wire 1) to negative (–) legof control circuits only.

Up to 4 actuators may be connected in parallel. With 4actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor, a +2% shift ofcontrol signal may be required. Power consumptionmust be observed.



4

5

GM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V for 0 to 10 VDC and 0 to 20 mA control signal.

Multiple actuators mounted to shaft

Model Maximum quantity per shaft

GM24 US 2

GM24-SR US 2

Control Signal (+)

2 to 10 VDC (–)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 2 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V

1

2

24 VAC Transformer

A

B GM24-SR US

LineVolts

1

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y Input, 2 to 10V

5 U Output 2 to 10V


2

5

4

3 A

B GM24-SR US

Control Signal (+)

0 to 20 mA (–)

Feedback Signal (+)

2 to 10 VDC (–)

Ω

500Ω

To otheractuators

LineVolts

1

W 0 7 2

W 0 7 3



72

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



®

10

5

0

10

5

0

m i n. 3 / 4 "

[ 2 0 m m ]

m i n. 2 1 / 2 "

[ 6 3 m m ]

Installation instruction for damper shafts with a minimum

length of 2 1/2 inch [63 mm] for GM series actuators

1. Move the damper to closed position.2. Position actuator onto damper shaft.

3. Hand tighten nuts on V-clamp.

4. If necessary, bend anti-rotation strap at both ends to fitbetween damper frame.

5. Fix anti-rotation strap to damper frame.6. Disengage gears with manual release button on casing.

7. Turn motor clamp back to 5°before closed position andallow gears to re-engage.

8. Align the actuator at 90°to the damper shaft and verify

that the damper is still in the fully closed position.9. Tighten nuts on the V-clamp.

Installation instruction for damper shafts with a minimumlength of 3/4 inch [20 mm] or bridging of damper frame

1. Disengage gears with manual release button on casing

(Manual operation).2. Turn actuator clamp back to 5°before closed position and

allow gears to re-engage.

3. Pull out universal clamp after removing retaining clip.4. Fix universal clamp onto damper shaft.

5. Move damper into closed position.6. Position actuator onto universal clamp.

7. Refit retaining clip.

8 If necessary bend or cut anti-rotation strap on either side

to fit the damper frame.9. Slide the stud of the anti-rotation strap into slot on actua-

tor base and fix it with screws to damper frame.

Actuator is mounted to vortexframe. and direct coupled tolinkage shaft.

2nd actuator

Linkage is part of

inlet vane assemblysupplied by manu-facturer.

Installation instruction for mounting GM actuators oninlet guide vanes.

1. Rotate vortex jackshaft fully counterclockwise.

2. Depress manual release button on actuator and rotateuniversal clamp fully counterclockwise.

3. Position the actuator on the jackshaft so that the actua-tor is in a position to mount to the anti-rotation strap.

4. Position and mount the anti-rotation strap to the vortex

frame so that the mounting stud is one-sixteenth inchfrom the bottom of the mounting slot of the actuator.

5. Verify that rotation of the actuator is correct for full oper-ation of the vortex blades. Adjust linkage if necessary.

Fully tighten the V-bolt nuts.

6. If additional torque is required, add second actuator tothe other end of the shaft assembly.



73


©


G M


1. Slip the actuator's universal clamp over the damper shaft.Make sure that the bottom of the actuator (metal side) is

toward the duct and the controls on the cover are accessi-ble. Place the actuator in the desired mounting position.

2. Turn the damper shaft until the blades are fully closed.3. Hand tighten the two nuts on the GM24 . . universal clamp.

4. Slide the stud of the anti-rotation bracket into the slot in the

bottom of the actuator. Bend the strap as needed to sup-port the rear of the actuator.

5. Fasten the strap to the duct with two screws. We recom-mend No. 8 self tapping sheet metal screws.

6. Loosen the two nuts on the universal clamp. Disengage the

actuator gear train by pressing the “manual override button”(half round black button). Keeping the gears disengaged,

and the damper fully closed, rotate the clamp until it isabout 5°from the closed position.

7. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp with a 10 mm wrench(Belimo Tool-01). Use 9 to 11 ft-lb of torque.

The damper is now fully closed but the actuator is 5°from fullyclosed. This is called “pre-loading” the actuator. When the

actuator is powered and sent to the closed position: it will putits full torque on the shaft compressing the edge and blade

seals. This ensures that the damper will meet its leakage rating.The actuator is electronically protected from overload and will not be

damaged.

Manual overrideThe Belimo GM24 . . actuators have a black, half round “manualoverride button” located on the top of the housing. Press this button

and the gear train is disengaged so the damper shaft can be moved

manually. Release the button and the gear train is re-engaged.

Testing the installation without power1. Disengage the gear train with the manual override button

and move the shaft from closed to open to closed. Ensurethat there is no binding and that the damper goes fully

open and closes with 5°of actuator stroke left.

2. Correct any problems and retest.

General Information

Standard Mounting

If more torque is required than one GM can provide, a second actuator may be installed on the same shaft. See page 78 for wiring details.

Multiple Actuator Mounting

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is

mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator.

2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting theBelimo actuator on the shaft.

For replacement of existing gear train actuators, there are two options:A. From a performance standpoint, it is best to mount the actuator directly onto the damper shaft.

B. If the damper shaft is not accessible, mount the GM24-. . actuator with a ZG-GM2 crankarm kit, and a mounting bracket(ZG-100, ZG-101, ZG-103, ZG-104)

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0

23

4 6 8 105 7 9

D a m p e r A r e a ( s q . f t . )


Torque LoadingChart


Damper torque loadings, used in selecting the correct size actua-

tor, should be provided by the damper manufacturer. If this

information is not available, the following general selectionguidelines can be used.



Parallel blade, without edge seals, 4 in-lb/sq. ft.for non-tight close-off applications



Parallel blade, with edge seals, 7 in-lb/sq. ft.


The above torque loadings will work for most applications under

2 in. w.g. static pressure or 1000 FPM face velocity. For appli-cations between this criteria and 3 in. w.g. or 2500 FPM, the

torque loading should be increased by a multiplier of 1.5. If theapplication calls for higher criteria up to 4 in. w.g. or 3000 FPM,

use a multiplier of 2.0.

®



74

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply before

attempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect andoverload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment tothe actuator must be made with flexible conduit.

Always read the controller manufacturer's installation literature carefully before making any connections. Follow allinstructions in this literature. If you have any questions, contactthe controller manufacturer and/or Belimo.

Transformer(s)The GM24… actuators requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformer anddraws a maximum of 6 VA for the GM24 US and 7VA for the

GM24-SR US. The actuator enclosure cannot be opened in thefield, there are no parts or components to be replaced orrepaired.

– EMC directive: 89/336/EEC – Software class A: Mode of operation type 1 – Low voltage directive: 73/23/EEC

CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digital con-trollers from a separate power transformer than that used foractuators or other end devices. The power supply design inour actuators and other end devices use half wave rectification.Some controllers use full wave rectification. When these twodifferent types of power supplies are connected to the samepower transformer and the DC commons are connected togeth-

er, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes in the fullwave power supply, damaging the controller. Only use a singlepower transformer to power the controller and actuator if youknow the controller power supply uses half wave rectification.

Multiple actuators, one transformerMultiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the subsequent rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is less

than or equal to the rating of the transformer.2. Polarity on the secondary of the transformer is strictly fol-

lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuators are connected to the common leg on the transformer and all No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hotleg.Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformer will result

in erratic operation or failure of the actuator and or controls.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the subsequentrules are followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied

to the negative leg of the control signal. See wiring diagramon page 16.

Wire length for GM… actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in Fig. 1 or 2. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator.Example for GM24-SR US: 3 actuators, 16 Ga wire

500 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 166 Ft. Maximum wire run

Maximum wire length:GM24 US

Wire Size Max. Feet. Wire Size Max. Feet12 Ga 1500 Ft. 18 Ga 375 Ft.

14 Ga 925 Ft. 20 Ga 200 Ft

16 Ga 550 Ft. 22 Ga 100 Ft

Figure 1

GM24-SR US


12 Ga 1250 Ft. 18 Ga 300 Ft.

14 Ga 800 Ft. 20 Ga 160 Ft

16 Ga 500 Ft. 22 Ga 85 Ft

Figure 2

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theGM24…actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The GM24… proportional actuators have a digital circuit that is

designed to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solvethis problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Reroute the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the

shield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actuatorcommon.

Reversing switch, “A/B”The GM… actuators have a reversing switch on the coverlabeled “A/B”. With the switch in position “A”, the GM24-SR US

actuator rotates clockwise with an increase in voltage or cur-rent. With the switch in Position “B”, the actuator rotates coun-terclockwise with an increase in voltage or current.

The GM24 US, on-off, tri-state actuators when set for switchposition “A”, rotates clockwise when power is applied to wire#2, and counterclockwise when power is applied to wire #3.

The GM24 US, on-off, tri-state actuators when set for switchposition “B”, rotates counterclockwise when power is applied towire #2, and clockwise when power is applied to wire #3.


®



75


©


G M

General Wiring Instructions (continued)

Installation Instructions ®

General

The GM Series actuators utilize brushless DC motor technolo-gy. The GM uses this motor in conjunction with an ApplicationSpecific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and con-

trols the actuator’s rotation and a digital rotation sensing func-tion to prevent damage to the actuator.

Brushless DC motor operationBelimo’s brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles of

stationary electromagnets housed inside of a rotating permanentmagnet. The electromagnetic poles are switched by a special

ASIC circuit developed by Belimo. Unlike the conventional DC

motor, there are no brushes to wear or commutators to foul.

Overload protection

The GM Series actuators are protected from overload at allangles of rotation. The ASIC circuit constantly monitors therotation of the DC motor inside the actuator and stops the puls-

es to the motor when it senses a stall condition. The DC motorremains energized and produces full rated torque to the load.

This helps ensure that dampers are fully closed and that edge

and blade seals are always properly compressed.


the technician a fast and easy way to check the actuator operation without having to switch wires or change settings on the thermostat. When the check-out is complete, make sure the switch is placed back to its original position.

The Position Indicator can be reversed depending on thedesired direction of rotation of the damper.

1. Pull out the whitepointer.

2. Turn the positionindication card.

3. Replace the whitepointer.

Electrical Operation

GM24 US Series actuators have built-in brushless DC motors which provide better accuracy and longer service life.

The GM24-SR US is designed with a unique non-symmetrical deadband. The actuator follows an increasing or decreasing controlsignal with a 40 mV resolution. If the signal changes in the opposite direction, the actuator will not respond until the control signal

changes by 200 mV. This allows the GM24-SR US to track even the slightest deviation very accurately, yet allowing the actuator to

“wait” for a much larger change in control signal due to control signal instability.


0

.1

.2.3

.4 .5 .6.7

.8

.9

1 0

.1

.2.3

.4.5.6.7

.8

.9

1






40 mV

200 mV

Actuator responds to a 40 mV signal whennot changing direction from stop position.

Actuator responds to a 200 mV signal whenreversing direction from stop position.



76

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


0

5

10

0

5

10

0

5

10

T O P

T O P

70%

Rotation Limitation GM Series

Non-Direct Mounting Methods

1. Disengage gears with manual release button on casing

(Manual operation).

2. Turn actuator clamp back to the “0” position for CW opera-tion when power is applied. “10” position for CCW operation

3. Pull out clamp after removing retaining clip. Note positionindicator is at 0. (A)

4. Locate the angle of rotation limiter (ZDB-GM) on the actua-

tor so that its mark sign lines up with the degree graduation

on the actuator face which corresponds with the required

rotation. (Every division represents approximately 10% ofthe angle of rotation). (B)

Example: 3 divisions away from the end position means:100% - (3 divisions x 10%) = 70%

5. Position clamp onto actuator and refit retaining clip. (C)

ZG-GM2 with ZG-100 Universal Mounting Bracket, usinglinkage to operate the damper blade.

Actuator is mounted to a universal mounting bracket or field-fabricated bracket. Connect to inlet vanes with linkage.

ZG-GM2 Damper linkage kit

GM. . type actuator

Front of actuator

Rear of actuator

➀

➃

➃

➄

➁

➂

ZG-GM2 Kit contains:

➀ front fixing attachment

➁ rear fixing attachment

➂ crankarm

➃ 2 bolts M6x16

➄ 7 sheet metal screws

2 KG10 ball joints

Wall mounting

ZG-104

A B C

Installation Instructions®



77


©


G M

Special Wiring Diagrams ®

Minimum position control of GM24-SR US from a voltagesignal and through a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

q

q

q

2

2

1

1

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts


SGA24 NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount)are identical electrically. Both act as a manual posi-tioner when no signal is present on terminal 4. Bothact as a minimum positioner when there is a signal onterminal 4 (output on terminal 3 is either the controlsignal or the knob setting, whichever is higher).


1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V

GM24-SR US


SGA24SGF24

1 Common

2 + Hot3 Output

4 Control Input

3

3


GM24 US or GM24-SR US can be connected to a NSV24.

Connectable Actuators Maximum per ModuleGM24 US 20

GM24-SR US 15

Actuator and controller must have separatetransformers.

2

3

2

1

To other

actuators

System battery back-up module NSV24 with GM24 US orGM24-SR US for fail-safe operation.

q

q

q

q

q

1

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

max4A (T)

Control

Signal

1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V

NSV24

1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V

(–)(+)

q

q

3

A

B

A

B

2 3 10 9

+

–

Batteries

1 11

Typical override closed of a GM24-SR US.

q

2

1

1

2

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

SPST

LineVolts


Override



Actuator drives to the low signal position when there

is no signal to wire 3 (SPST relay energized). Adjustreversing switch (CW-CCW) so the low signal posi-tions the damper in its desired end position.


Blk (1) Common –Red (2) Hot +

Wht (3) Y Input, 2 to 10 V

Wht (5) U Output, 2 to 10 V

GM24-SR US

c

qq

3

3



78

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Special Wiring Diagrams®


A maximum of 2 GM… actuators may be mounted onto acommon shaft


2

3

2

1

Wiring multiple GM24-SR US actuators on the same shaft

q

q

q

q

1

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Control

Signal

1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V

GM24-SR US

1 Common

2 + Hot


5 U Output 2 to 10V

GM24-SR US

(–)(+)

3

A

B

A

B


A maximum of 2 GM… actuators may be mounted onto acommon shaft


2

3

2

1

Wiring multiple GM24 US actuators on the same shaft

q

q

q

q q

q

1

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot


GM24 US

1 Common

2 + Hot


GM24 US

3

A

B

A

B



79


©


G M

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For GM24-SR US

Procedure





position.











GM24-SR US this is 0 to 10 VDC or

0 to 20 mA.



ator move.

Use the manual override button to







Expected Response


Signal” position.



the actuator(s). Minimum volt-age of 19.2 VAC or 21.6 VDC.


Signal” position.


tion




cate.


to fully open.




Go To Step…

Actuator operates

properly

Step 8


ed, actuator begins

to driveStep 1

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Controller output

(actuator input) is

correct. Input

Polarity Correct.

Step 6

Damper moves

properly

Step 7

Defective Actuator.

Replace Actuator -

See Note 2


Go To Step…

No response at all

Step 2Operation is

reversed


toward "Control

Signal Position"

Step 4

Power wiring

corrected, actuator

still does not driveStep 4

Does not drive

toward “Control

Signal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Reprogram, adjust

repair or replace


Step 1

Find cause of

damper jam and

repair.

Step 1


requirement and


Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.








GM24-SR US Electrical check-out procedure

®



80

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


AM Series Direct Coupled Actuator

Areas of Application

Versatile and Powerful

q Minimum 160 in-lb torque in a compact package.

For damper areas up to 40 sq-ft*.

®

3 / 4" m i n AV1

1

2

3

4

5

5

4

1

3

1

Kit specification

2 ball joints KG8 (20204)

Spacer (22127)

Crank arm (22165)

Front mounting

bracket (22167)

Rear mounting

bracket (20346)

2 Screws M6 x 16 (43600)

7 Self-tapping screws 4,2 x 13 (43990)

2

Direct Coupledup to 3/4” standard shafts

or Jackshafts to 1.05”

(with K4-1 Clamp)

Mounting with

linkage (ZG-AM

accessory kit)

Short shaft

mounting (with

AV1 clamp)

Fits Jackshafts also.

Torque: 160 in-lb q q q 133 in-lb 133in-lb

Power supply: 24 VAC/DC q q q q q

Control signal: on-off/f loating q q On/Off

Control signal: proportional 2 to 10 VDC q

Control signal: 0… 135Ω or Honeywell ®

qElectronic Series 90

Feedback: 2 to 10 VDC q

Running time: 150 sec constant q

Running time: 110 to 150 secq q

load dependant

Running time: 100 to 200 secq

load dependant

Running time: 16 to 19 secq

load dependant

External direction of rotation switch q q q q q

Conduit fitting q q q q q

Appliance cable q q q q q

Built-in auxiliary switches q

UL listed, CSA certified, CE q q q q q

Installation instructions ......(p. 89–93) General wiring ..............(p. 91) Start-up and checkout (p. 97)Actuator sizing ..................(p. 90) Special wiring ................(p. 94–96)


A M 2 4 U S ( p . 8

2 )

A M 2 4

- S U S ( p

. 8 2 )

A M 2 4

- S R U S

( p .

8 4 )

S M 2 4

- S R 9 4 U

S ( p

. 8 6 )

S M 2 4

- S U S ( p

. 8 8 )

AM Series – at a glance



81


©


A M

AM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®


UL

q 20% more torque than SM.

q Fits inside 4” damper frame.

q Full stroke overload protection.

q Electronic deadband for accuracy and stability(proportional models).

q Easy direct coupled mounting, including jackshaftsto 1.05”.

q Check damper position with clear position indicator.

q Set actuator to compensate for damper seal wear andcompression (proportional models).

q Constant running time aids control loop tuning(proportional models).

q Added flexibility with built-in mechanical stops.

q Fully adjustable, built-in auxiliary switches(AM24-S US only).

q Auxiliary switch add-on mounts on clamp,

includes conduit fitting (SA1 US, SA2 US).

q Push button manual override

q Easily reverse control direction with switch on housing

q 3’ cable speeds installations












o ’ sC o m

mit m e n t t o

Q u a

l i t y

S i n c e 19 9 1

I S O 9 0 0 1



82

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


AM24(-S) USOn-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

ApplicationFor on-off and floating point control of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the

damper manufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 3/4”

in diameter by means of its universal clamp, or up to a 1.05” jackshaft with the optional K4-1 clamp. A crankarm and sever-

al mounting brackets are available for applications where theactuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft. The

AM24-S US is constructed to meet the requirements for doubleinsulated devices.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require any

limit switches, but is electronically protected against overload.

The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. Whenreaching the damper or actuator end position, the actuator

automatically stops. The gears can be manually disengagedwith a button on the actuator cover. The position of the actua-

tor is indicated by a visual pointer. The anti-rotation strap sup-plied with the actuator will prevent lateral movement.

The AM24-S US version is provided with two built-in auxiliary

switches. These SPDT switches are provided for safety inter-facing or signaling. The switching function is adjustablebetween 0 and 95°.

Torque min. 160 in-lb, for control of air dampers.

AM24 US

AM24-S US

Technical Data AM24 US, AM24-S US

Power supply 24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz 24 VDC ±10%

Power consumption 2.5 W

Transformer sizing 4.5 VA (Class 2 power source)

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA, appliance cable,1/2” conduit connector


Angle of rotation 0-95°adjustable stops


Direction of rotation reversible with switch “CCW-CW”

Position indication clip-on indicator

Running time 100 to 150 sec. for 0 to 160 in-lb

Manual override external push button

Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensingAmbient temperature -22°F to +122°F [-30°C to +50°C]


Housing type NEMA 2 (IP54 with cable entry down)

Housing material rating UL94-5V (flammability rating)

Noise level less than 45 dB (A)




Weight 2.8 lbs [1.3 kg]

AM24-S US

Auxiliary switches adj. 0°to 95°, 2 x SPDT 6 A (1.5A)@24 VAC


8.75" [222]

7.5" [191]1.81" [46]

3.62"

[92]

.90"[23]

3.0"[76]

1.77"[45]

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Optional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4USclamp

3/8" to 5/8"



UL

AM24 US

®

D 0 1 3



83


©


A M

12

424 VAC Transformer

The indication of directionis valid for switch position CW.

Blk (1) Common

Wht (2) +

Wht (3) +

AM24(-S) US

CCW CW

LineVolts

–

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

0° to 95°

0° to 95°

NO

NO

NC

NC

3

4

AM24(-S) US

AM24(-S) USOn-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

AM24(-S) US- Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled type

which require no crank arm and linkage and be capable of directmounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter. Actuators shall

be UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warranty, and be manu-

factured under ISO 9001 International Quality Control


override on the cover, and be protected from overload at all

angles of rotation. If required, two adjustable SPDT auxiliary

switches shall be provided (AM24-S US). Actuators shall be as

manufactured by Belimo. Actuators with switches must be con-

structed to meet the requirements for double insulation so an elec-

trical ground connection is not required to meet agency listings.

Auxiliary switch wiring for AM24-S US

3

4

2


Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.

For end position indication, interlock control, fan startup,etc., AM24-S US incorporates two built-in auxiliary switch-es: 2 x SPDT, 6A (1.5A) @24 VAC, UL listed,adjustable between 0° and 95°.

Meets UL and CSA requirements without the need ofan electrical ground connection.

Notes

Wiring diagrams

AccessoriesAV 1 Damper shaft extension for AMAV10-18 Universal shaft extension

K4 US On All Accessories lists in the bookK4-1 US Clamp for 3/4” to 1.05” jackshafts

K4-H Hex shaft clamp, for 3/8”-5/8” shaftsKH-AM Crankarm

SA1 US, SA2 US Auxiliary switches

PA… US 140 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω, 2800 Ω feedbackpotentiometers

Tool-01 10 mm wrenchZG-AM Crank arm adaptor kit

ZG-100 Mounting bracket

ZG-101 Mounting bracketZG-103 Mounting bracket

ZG-104 Mounting bracketZS-100 Weather shield (metal)



12

424 VAC Transformer

a opena closed


Blk (1) Common

Wht (2) +

Wht (3) +

AM24(-S) US

CCW CW

a

LineVolts

–

On-off control

Floating point or on-off control

®

W

0 7 4

W 0 7 6

W 0 7 5



84

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


AM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

Application

For proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.Actual actuator sizing should be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator is mounted directly to a damper shaft up to 3/4”in diameter by means of its universal clamp, or up to a 1.05”

jackshaft with the optional K4-1 clamp. A crankarm and severalmounting brackets are available for applications where the

actuator cannot be direct coupled to the damper shaft.

OperationThe actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or, with theaddition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from an

electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal

is provided for position indication or master-slave applications.

The actuator has a constant running time of 150 seconds. Afunctional test of the actuator-damper assembly may be done

by pressing in the manual override button, this will activate theactuators test mode and cycle the actuator fully closed and

back to control point. The microprocessor will correct for com-pression of tight close-off gaskets with age, providing the actua-

tor is not on its mechanical stops.

A 2 to 10 VDC feedback (U) is provided with full 8 volt output

range proportional to the operational rotation of the damper. Adigital rotation sensing circuit protects the actuator in a stall any-

where in its 95°operating range without the need of limit switches.

Add on auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto theactuator body for signalling and switching functions.

8.75" [222]

7.5" [191]1.81" [46]

3.62"

[92]

.90"[23]

3.0"[76]

1.77"[45]

Standard:

1/2" to 1.05"

Optional*

3/8" to 3/4"

*with K4 USclamp

3/8" to 5/8"

Technical Data AM24-SR US

Power supply 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60 Hz24 VDC, ±10%

Power consumption 2.5 W running, 1.2 W holding

Transformer sizing 5 VA (Class 2 power source)


Input impedance 100kΩ (0.1 mA), 500Ω for 4 to 20mA

Feedback output 'U' 2 to 10 VDC, 0.5 mA max

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA, appliance cable,1/2” conduit connector


Torque min 160 in-lb (18 Nm)

Direction of rotation reversible with switch “CCW-CW”CW with a decrease in voltageCCW with a decrease in voltage

Position indication clip on indicator



Running time 150 secs. constant, independent of load

Run time stability ± 5%


Operating temperature -22 to +122°F (-30 to +50°C)

Storage temperature -40 to +176°F (-40 to +80°C)

Housing NEMA 2 (IP54 with cable entry down)

Housing material UL 94-5V (flammability rating)





Weight 2.8 lbs. (1.3kg.)


Torque min. 160 in-lb, for control of air dampers.


UL

AM24-SR US

®

D 0 0 7



85


©


A M

AM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

AM24-SR US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled

type which require no crank arm and linkage and be capableof direct mounting to a jackshaft up to a 1.05” diameter.

Actuators shall be UL and CSA listed, have a 5 year warran-

ty, and be manufactured under ISO 9001 International Quality

Control Standards. The actuator must provide proportional

damper control in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, or, with the

addition of a 500Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA control input from

an electronic controller or positioner. Actuators shall have

reversing switch and gear disengagement button on the

cover, and be electronically protected from overload at all

angles of rotation. Actuators shall respond to 2 to 10VDC

output relative to position regardless of the amount of damper

rotation. Run time shall be constant and independent of

torque. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be provided for

position indication or master-slave applications. Actuatorsshall be as manufactured by Belimo.

Wiring diagrams

2




The ZG-R01 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA

control signal to 2 to 10 VDC, up to 2 actuators maybe connected in parallel.

Only connect common to neg. (—) leg of control circuits.

4

5

3

AccessoriesAV 1 Damper shaft extension for AMAV10-18 Universal shaft extension

K4-1 Clamp for 3/4” to 1.05” jackshaftsK4-H Hex shaft clamp, for 3/8”-5/8” shafts

KH-AM CrankarmSA1 US, SA2 US Auxiliary switches

PA… US 140 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω, 2800 Ω feedback

potentiometersPTA-250 Pulse width modulation interface

Tool-01 10 mm wrenchSGA24 Min. and/or man. positioner in NEMA 4 housing

SGF24 Min. and/or man. positioner for flush panel mounting

ZAD24 Digital position indicationZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 0 to 20 mA control signal

ZG-AM Crank arm adaptor kitZG-100 Mounting bracket



ZS-100 Weather shieldZS-150 Weather shield


®

1

2

3

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) Hot +


Wht (5) U Output, 2 to 10V

AM24-SR US

LineVolts

2 to 10 VDC

Control Signal (–)

(+)

–

4

To otheractuators

3

5

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) Hot +


Wht (5) U Output, 2 to 10V


(–)(+)


(–)(+)

Ω

500Ω

2AM24-SR US

1

Line

Volts

–

W

0 7 7



Technical Data SM24-SR94



Transformer sizing 4.2 VA

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA cable 1/2" conduit connector

Control signal Honeywell electronic Series 90, or a 0 . . . 135 Ω input


Torque at rated voltage min. 133 in-lb [15 Nm], max 180 in-lb [20 Nm]Direction of rotation reversible with switch A / B

Position indication 0 . . . 10 and reversible indicator

Running time 100 . . . 200 sec for 0 to 133 in-lbs [0 to 15 Nm]


Housing type NEMA type 2

Housing material rating UL 94V-0 (flammability rating)





Weight 3.2 lbs. [1.46 kg]

86

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Wiring diagram

SM24-SR94 USModulating actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V for use with Honeywell* electronic Series 90 controllers,or a 0 . . . 135 Ω input.

25/32 [20]

3/8 to 3/4 [10…20]3/8 to 5/8 [10…16]

21/32 [17]

2 9/16[65]

4 27/32[123]

1 3 / 1

6 [ 3 0 ]

7 23/32 [196]

8 15/16 [227]


Application

For modulating control of dampers up toapproximately 35 ft2 [3 m2] (based on 4 in-lb per sq. ft.). Actual actuator sizingshould be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications.Control is with a Honeywell electronicseries 90, or a 0 . . . 135 Ω electro-mechanical controller.

OperationThe actuator is, by means of a special clamp,directly mounted onto the damper shaft.The universal mounting bracket suppliedwith the actuator will prevent lateral move-ment of the actuator. The damper actuatoris not provided with and does not requireany limiting switches, but is protectedagainst overloading.The angle of rotation is mechanically limit-ed to 95°. When reaching the damper oractuator end position, the motor stopsautomatically. The gears can be manuallydisengaged by simply pressing down thespring loaded button on the actuator cover.When this button is pressed down, thedamper blades can be adjusted by hand.The position of the actuator is indicated bymeans of a scale reading 0 . . . 10.

AccessoriesS1, S2 Auxiliary switchesP. . . Feedback potentiometerZG-SM2Crank arm adaptor kit

ZDB Angle of rotation l imiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-103 Horizontal bracket, for replacing

Honeywell crank arm type actuatorZG-104 Vertical bracket, for replacing

Honeywell crank arm type actuatorZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZS-100 Weather shield, metalZS-100 Weather shield, polycarbonateResistor KitsZG-R03 For use in true 135Ω circuitsZG-R04 For use with Electronic Series

90 circuits (W7100, W973)

Torque min. 133 in-lb, for control ofdamper surface up to 35 ft2.


UL

®

D 0 5 4

W

1 2 3 4 5 Wire No

SM24-SR94

R Bcom~(P1) (P2) (P3)

Switch Open Contact

a Damper Open

b Damper Closed

c Damper Closed

Control Override*

* with the direction of rotationswitch at A and the position ofthe damper with no signal atwire R closed.

The actuator is equipped with aswitch to reverse rotation, makingit unnecessary to reverse the wiring.

For parallel operation, seeapplications section.

Cannot be used with aFM24-SR90 or a SM24-SR90

2 4 V A C

2 4 V A C

Controller

W R B

cba

Also available, AF24-MFT95 US – Spring return, 133 in-lb, Electronic series 90and 0-135Ω, 2-10 VDC feedback. See Multi-Function Product Documentation.

W 1 5 9



87


©


A M

SM24-SR94 USModulating actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V for use with Honeywell* electronic Series 90 controllers,or a 0 . . . 135 Ω input.

®

Fig. 4 Wiring of multiple actuators to one Series 90 controllerFig. 2 SM24-S94 used witha Series 90 controller and aSeries 90 low limit control

Fig. 3 SM24-S94 used witha Series 90 controller and aSeries 90 high limit control

Fig. 5 Wiring of multiple actuators to a Series 90 controller using one mini-mum position potentiometer Notes for all wiring diagrams

Resistor value depends on the typeof controller and number of actua-tors. No resistor is used for oneactuator. Honeywell resistor kitsmay also be used.

To reverse actuator control rotation,use the reversing switch at the endof the actuator.

Provide disconnect means andoverload protection as required.

Note: Consult controller instructiondata for more detailed installationinformation.

1

4

6

Series 90 Controller

W

W

B

R

R B

W

1 2 3 4 5 Wire No

SM24-SR94

R Bcom~ 4

6

Note: Consult controllerinstruction data for moredetailed installationinformation.

Series 90 Low Limit Control135Ω for 0 to 50% control280Ω for 0 to 100% control

2 4 V A C

Series 90 Controller

W R B

W

B

R

W

1 2 3 4 5 Wire No

SM24-SR94

R Bcom~ 4

6


Series 90 High Limit Control

2 4 V A C

2 4 V A C

Series 90Controller

W R B

W

1 2 3 4 5 Wire No

SM24-SR94

R Bcom~ 4

1

W

1 2 3 4 5 Wire No

SM24-SR94

R Bcom~ 4

1

6

Controller

2 4 V A C

~ ~

~

Ω

Number of ResistanceActuators Ω

2 1403 71.54 47.55 37.56 28

Resistor Kit No. ZG-R03

135 Ω Series 90 Controllers

Parallel Operation

Note: Consult controller

instruction data for more

detailed installationinformation.

1

2

2 4 V A C

Series 90Controller

W R B

W R B

W

1 2 3 4 5 Wire No

SM24-SR94

R Bcom

~ 4

5

W

1 2 3 4 5 Wire No

SM24-SR94

R Bcom

~ 4

5

~ ~

~

6

2

6


Controller

2 4 V A C

Ω

W

R

B

Honeywell H205ChangeoverController

Honeywell S963A

Minimum PositionPotentiometer

OccupiedContact

W 1 5 5

W 1 5 6

W 1 5 8

W 1 5 7



88

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


SM24-S USOn-off, non-spring return, direct coupled, fast running, 24 V with built-in auxiliary switches

®

Technical Data SM24 -S


24 VDC ± 10%

Power consumption AC Stand-by 1.2 W

Full Load 9.5 W

Transformer sizing 12 VA

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA cable 1/2" conduit connector


Torque at rated voltage 133 in-lb [15 Nm]

Direction of rotation reversible with switch A / B

Position indication 0 . . . 10 and reversible indicator

Running time Load Free approx. 16 seconds

Full Load approx. 19 seconds

Auxiliary switch Open/Closed 2 SPST 2A, 24 V



Housing material rating UL 94V-0 (f lammability rating)



Noise level 45 dB (A)


Service life minimum 10,000 operations

Weight 3.3 lbs. [1.5 kg]

Wiring diagram

+ +SM24-S

24 VAC/VDC

(–) (+)

1 2 3 4 5 6 Wire No

Parallel connection of severalactuators is possible:

The indication of direc-tion is valid for switch position A

For end position indication, interlock control,etc., SM24-S incorporates 2 built-in auxil-iary switches 2 x SPST (2A) 24 V UL listed

a open

a closed

a

C O M


ApplicationFor on-off, fast-acting, control of dampersup to approximately 35 ft2 [3 m2] (based on4 in-lb per sq. ft.). Actual actuator sizingshould be done in accordance with thedamper manufacturer’s specifications.Control is on-off, two position, from an auxil-iary contactor or a manual switch.The direction of rotation is reversible by theuse of a switch located on the actuatorcover.

OperationThe actuator is, by means of a specialclamp, directly mounted onto the dampershaft.

The universal mounting bracket suppliedwith the actuator will prevent lateral move-ment of the actuator. The damper actuatoris not provided with and does not requireany limiting switches, but is protectedagainst overloading.The angle of rotation is mechanically limitedto 95°. When reaching the damper or actua-tor end position, the motor stops automati-cally.The gears can be manually disengaged bysimply pressing down the spring loaded but-ton on the actuator cover. When the buttonis pressed down, the damper blades can beadjusted by hand. The position of the actua-

tor is indicated by means of a scale reading0 . . . 10.For end position indication, interlock control,etc., two built-in, non-adjustable auxiliaryswitches are provided with the actuator.

AccessoriesZG-SM2 Crank arm adaptor kitZDB Angle of rotation limiterZG-100 Universal mounting bracketZG-101 Universal mounting bracketZG-102 Multiple actuator mounting bracketZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZS-100 Weather shield, metalZG-150 Weather shield, polycarbonate

Torque min. 133 in-lb, for control ofdamper surface up to 35 ft2.

q

80° 10°


UL

25/32 [20]

3/8 to 3/4 [10…20]3/8 to 5/8 [10…16]

21/32 [17]

2 9/16[65]

4 27/32[123]

1 3 / 1

6 [ 3 0 ]

7 23/32 [196]

8 15/16 [227]

D 0 5 4



89


©


A M

Installation InstructionsQuick-Mount Visual Instructions

1. Turn damper blade to its fully closed position. With manual

override button depressed, rotate actuator clamp to about1/16” - 1/8” between actuator stop and clamp, depending on

damper seal design. Slide actuator over shaft and finger-tighten nuts.

2. Using a screwdriver, Select clockwise or counterclockwise rota-

tion. (Example shown is for clockwise closing damper). Slide

anti-rotation bracket up under actuator engaging center cut-outon actuator back. Secure bracket with self-tapping screws.

3. Tighten the two nuts on the universal clamp with 10 mm

wrench, 6-8 ft-lb torque. (On dampers with edge seals, actuatorwill compress damper blades when reaching end position for

air-tight damper.)

4. Adjust end stops, if required.

1 2

3 4

m i n . 48

10...16

10...20

m i n . 1 .8 8 ” [ 4 8 ]

3/8”…3/4”

3/8”…5/8”

R

L

M

M

1/4"

9 Nm

➀

➁ ➂

1/16" - 1/8"

®



Installation InstructionsActuator sizing/preliminary steps


be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. (See Belimo Mechanical Accessories Doc. 5.2)2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and

service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft.

3. The AM Series actuator requires a minimum shaft length of 1.88”.Use the AV1 for short shaft installations on 1/2” diameter shafts.

Replacement or mounting of optional mounting clamp

1. Squeeze tabs of retaining ring and lift off of actuator.2. Remove clamp.3. Replacement clamp has an alignment mark.

Match this mark with the similar mark on the actuator and mount clamp.4. Squeeze tabs of retaining ring and fit it into the retaining slot.

Note: If retaining ring is not fully seated, the clamp may come loosefrom the actuator.

Basic Formula for Actuator Sizing




(35 ft2) x (4 in-lb/ft2) = (140 in-lb) Belimo AM 160 in-lb

When rated loading of damper is not available:The following general selection guide may be used when it is not possible to obtain the damper manufacturer’s rated torque load-ing. Note multiplier for face velocity (feet per minute, FPM).


< 1000 FPM/2 in w.g. 1000-2500 FPM/3 in w.g. 2500-3000 FPM/4 in w.g.

Air-tight applicationRound blade/edge seals 10 15 20


Normal close-off applicationRound blade/metal seat 5 7.5 10Parallel blade/no edge seals 4 6 8

Opposed blade/no edge seals 3 4.5 6

Alignmentpoints

90

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


®

AV1



91


©


A M



enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply beforeattempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-

nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect and

overload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,

conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachment tothe actuator must be made with flexible conduit.

Always read the controller manufacturer's installation liter-

ature carefully before making any connections. Follow allinstructions in this literature. If you have any questions, contact

the controller manufacturer and/or Belimo.

Transformer(s)The AM Series actuators require a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draw a maximum of 5 VA. The actuator enclosure cannot

be opened in the field, there are no parts or components to bereplaced or repaired.

– EMC directive: 89/336/EEC

– Software class A: Mode of operation type 1 – Low voltage directive: 73/23/EEC

CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digital con-

trollers from a separate power transformer than that used for

actuators or other end devices. The power supply design inour actuators and other end devices use half wave rectification.

Some controllers use full wave rectification. When these twodifferent types of power supplies are connected to the same

power transformer and the DC commons are connected togeth-

er, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes in the full

wave power supply, damaging the controller. Only use a singlepower transformer to power the controller and actuator if youknow the controller power supply uses half wave rectification.

Multiple actuators, one transformerMultiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-

vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is less


lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuators

are connected to the common leg on the transformer and all No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hotleg.

Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformer will

result in erratic operation or failure of the actuator and orcontrols.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the following rules

are followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.

2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied


Wire length for AM Series actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in the Fig. 1. If

more than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators to

determine the maximum run to any single actuator.



12 Ga 1800 Ft. 18 Ga 450 Ft.

14 Ga 1100 Ft. 20 Ga 275 Ft

16 Ga 700 Ft. 22 Ga 125 Ft

Fig. 1

Example for AM… US: 3 actuators, 18 Ga wire

450 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 150 Ft. Maximum wire run.

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theAM24 type actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminal

strips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It is

good practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuator

to the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice being

inadvertently pulled apart.

Overload protectionAll Belimo actuators are electronically protected against over-

load. In the AM series an electronic circuit maintains the cur-

rent at a level which will not damage the motor while providingadequate holding torque.

Operational Information for AM Series Proportional Actuators (AM24-SR US)

InitializationThe proportional models of the AM series (AM24-SR US,) must go

through an initialization procedure to learn the zero signal position.

When the power is first applied to the actuator, or the gear releasebutton is depressed, the actuator will move to its zero signal position.

After the actuator learns this, it will drive to its control position.

Note: If power is lost to the actuator, and the actuator is moved by

use of its manual override, the actuator must be re-initialized whenpower is returned, by pushing the override button.

Motor position detectionBelimo brushless DC motors eliminate the need for potentiome-

ters for positioning. Inside the motor are three “Hall Effect”

sensors. These sensors detect the spinning rotor and sendpulses to the microprocessor which counts the pulses and cal-

culates the position to within 1/3 of a revolution of the motor.

®



92

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Adjust angle-of-rotationin steps of 2.5°


Manual Override

Installation InstructionsFeature operation

Mechanical Angle of Rotation Limiting

The adjustable stops are needed when there is no damper stopor if you want the damper to stop rotating before it reaches its

stops. The AM actuator can be indefinitely stalled in any posi-tion without harm.

1. Loosen the two end stops with a No. 2 Phillips head screwdriver

being careful not to unscrew the captive nut under the slot.2. Move the stops (in 2.5°steps) to the desired position and re-

tighten the screws.

AM actuators have a reversing switch on the cover labeled“CW-CCW”. Switch position indicates start point. For the

AM24-SR US, with the switch in position “CW”, the actuatorrotates clockwise with an decrease in voltage or current. With

the switch in position “CCW”, the actuator rotates counterclock-

wise with an decrease in voltage or current.

The AM24 (-S) US rotates clockwise when the switch is in the “CW”position and power is applied to wire #2. When power is applied to

wire #3 the actuator rotates counter clockwise.Rotating the “CW/CCW” switch to “CCW” reverses the control

logic.


the technician a fast and easy way to check the actuator operation without having to switch wires or change settings on the

thermostat. When the check-out is complete, make sure the

switch is placed back to its original position.

CW M

CCW M

CW M

CCW M

2 VDC 10 VDC10 VDC 2 VDC

A button on the actuator cover disengages the gear train so the

damper shaft can be moved manually. Release the button and thegear train is re-engaged.

Use the manual override to test the installation withoutpower. For tight shut-off the damper should close with 5°of actuator stroke left.

CW M

CCWM

Gear release button

AM Series proportional actuators have built-in brushless DC motors which provide better accuracy and longer service life.

The AM Series actuators are designed with a unique non-symmetrical deadband. The actuator follows an increasing or

decreasing control signal with a 80 mV resolution. If the signal changes in the opposite direction, the actuator will not responduntil the control signal changes by 200 mV. This allows these actuators to track even the slightest deviation very accurately,

yet allowing the actuator to “wait” for a much larger change in control signal due to control signal instability.







80 mV

200 mV

AM Actuator responds to a 80 mV signal whennot changing direction from stop position.

AM Actuator responds to a 200 mV signalwhen reversing direction from stop position.

AM24-SR US, AM24-SRS US

®



93


©


A M

Installation Instructions and AccessoriesFeature operation and additional accessories

AV1 Short shaft adaptor

Used on 3/8” to 3/4" diameter

shafts that are shorter than1.875" and mounting space is

minimal. See Mechanical

Accessories Booklet # 4.2

AV 10-18 Shaft extension

For damper shafts 3/8 to 11/16 in

[10 to 18] dia or 3/8 to 9/16 in [10

to 14] square. See MechanicalAccessories Booklet # 4.2

Mounting brackets

SA…US Auxiliary switches, PA…US Feedback potentiometers

See Electronic

AccessoriesBooklet # 4.1

SGA24/SGF24

Minimum and/or manual positioner(electronic), SGA24 is enclosed in

a NEMA 4 housing. The SGF24 isfor flush panel mounting. SeeElectronic Accessories Booklet # 4.1

240

SGA24SGF24

1

2

3

4

5

5

4

1

3

1

Kit specification

2 ball joints KG8 (20204)

Spacer (22127)

Crank arm (22165)

Front mounting

bracket (22167)

Rear mounting

bracket (20346)

2 Screws M6 x 16 (43600)

7 Self-tapping screws 4,2 x 13 (43990)

2

3 / 4" m i n AV1

9.44”




See Mechanical Accessories

Booklet # 4.2

See Mechanical Accessories Booklet # 4.2

R

L

M

M

1

. 8

. 6

. 4

. 2

0

0 . 2

. 4

. 6

. 8 1

R

L

M

M

1

. 8

. 6 . 4

. 2

0

0

. 2

. 4

. 6

. 8 1

R

L

M

M

R

L

M

M

Adjustable Auxiliary Switches

The AM24-S US actuator is equipped with two adjustable auxiliary

switches used to indicate damper position or to interface additionalcontrols or equipment. Switching positions can be set over the full

scale of 0 to 95°simply by setting switch on the actuator cover.

Method A1. Push the manual override button and rotate the clamp to the

“0” position.

2. Set the desired switch position: example: 20% of rotation is“.2” on the setting scale.

3. Check the switch operation. As the indicator passes the “0”

switch position, the contact between S1 and S2, or S4 andS5, is broken and the contact between S1 and S3, or S5

and S6 is made.

Method B

1. Use manual override to position universal clamp to desiredswitch position.

2. Turn switch pointer to “0”.

(switch function may also be

monitored by a meter forprecise setting)

0% 100%

20%

1

0

.2

.4.6

.8

S4

S6S5

S4

S6S5

1

0.2

.4.6

.8

S1

S3S2

S1

S3S2

Voltage Resistive load Inductive load

24 VAC 6 A 1.5 A

Switch Rating

Clamp is in the “0” position

Accessories

®

ZG-AM - Crank arm adaptor kit

For use when the actuator cannotbe mounted directly to the

damper shaft.



94

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Typical override open of a AM24-SR US Both the overrideclosed and the override open circuit can be combined on oneactuator. Wire the relay contacts in series. Determine which

signal has the highest precedence and connect that relay elec-trically closest to the actuator.

Typical override closed of a AM24-SR US.

q

2

1

1

2

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

SPST

LineVolts


Override



Actuator drives to the low signal position when thereis no signal to wire 3 (SPST relay energized). Adjustreversing switch (CW-CCW) so the low signal posi-tions the damper in its desired end position.


Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +



AM24-SR US

c

qq

3

3

Override functions AM24-SR US.

qq

2

1

1

2

a

b

c

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts



Diode e.g. 1N4007

“Y” terminal is also used for override inputs “Z”

Actuator will go to the 50% position (approx 45°).Works with AC power source only.


Wht (3) Y (Z)

Wht (5) U

AM24-SR US

q

q

q

q

q

q

3

4

3

Special Wiring DiagramsAM24-SR US

q

q q

2

2

3

1

1

3

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Control Signal


Actuator drives to the high signal position when 24VAChot is connected to wire 3 (SPDT relay energized).Adjust Reversing Switch (CW-CCW) so the high signalpositions the damper to its desired position.CAUTION: Do not short 24 VAC hot to the (+) leg ofthe control signal or the controller may be damaged.


Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +



AM24-SR US

Override “Open”

Circuit

c

SPDTq

qq

1

2

1

2

3

4

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts



Wht (3) Y (Z)

Wht (5) U

AM24-SR US

q

q

q

q

q

3

Intermed. position 50%

ca bFunctions

2 to 10 VDC control mode

0% position

100% position

with relay or singleswitch contacts Intermed. position 50%

Functions

2 to 10 VDC control mode

0% position

100% position

Pos

1

2

3

4

with rotary switch44

®



95


©


A MBlk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +




IMPORTANT Observe polarity on secondary of transformers. Connectall actuator Wire 1 and Control Signal (–) to one leg of the transformer(bold line) and all actuator Wire 2 to the other leg of the transformer.Incorrect polarity can damage controller or cause erratic operation.

Set reversing switch (CCW/CW) as required by control logic.

When individual transformers are used for each actuator, the hot line fromthe transformer only goes to one actuator. The common wire 1 of all actua-tors must be wired together.


Total input impedance of the combined actuators cannot be lowerthan the output impedance of the controller.

2

3

4

42

1

To other

actuators

5

Parallel control of two or more actuators from a voltage signal usingeither one transformer for all actuators or individual transformersfor each actuator. (See Wiring Guide Doc. 5.2 for more detail.)

q

q

q

q

q


Line

Volts

Control

Signal

AM24-SR US

1

LineVolts

Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +



AM24-SR US

(–)(+)

q

q

3

5

5

5

6

6

Special Wiring DiagramsAM24-SR US

Minimum position control of AM24-SR US from a voltage signaland through a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

2

2

1

1

(–)(+)

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts


SGA24 (NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount) are iden-tical electrically. Both act as a manual positioner when no signalis present on terminal 4. Both act as a minimum positionerwhen there is a signal on terminal 4 (output on terminal 3 iseither the control signal or the knob setting, whichever is higher).


Parallel connection of up to 4 actuators is possible

Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +



AM24-SR US


SGA24SGF24

3

3

4

Remote control of AM24-SR US using a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

Function check

q

q

2

2

1

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts


SGA24 (NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount) are identi-cal electrically. Both act as a manual positioner when no signal ispresent on terminal 4. Both act as a minimum positioner whenthere is a signal on terminal 4 (output on terminal 3 is either thecontrol signal or the knob setting, whichever is higher).


Parallel connection of up to 4 actuators is possible

Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +



AM24-SR US

SGA24SGF24

3

3

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +



AM24-SR US

Procedure• 24 V (Hot) at wires 1 and 2• Disconnect wire 3 from controller wiring.

Note: If wire 3 is not disconnected from the controller, damage to the controller will occur.- For direction of rotation position “CCW”: actuator runs

- For direction of rotation position “CW”: actuator runs• Connect wires 3 to 2 with a jumper. Or connect thewire leads together- actuator runs in the opposite direction to end stop

44

4

1 Common2 + Hot

3 Output4 Control Input

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Output

4 Control Input

q

q

q

®



96

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Special Wiring DiagramsAM24 US, AM24-SR US

q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts




(–)

(+)Control Signal

2 to 10 VDC

3

2

1

AM24-SR US

q

q

q

q

q

Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) Hot +



3

AM24-SR US

CCW CW

CCW CW

2



Set reversing switch (CCW-CW) as required by controllogic and control range.

3

q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Blk (1) Common –Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

3

2

1

AM24 US

q

q

q

q

q

q

q

Blk (1) Common –

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

3

AM24 US

CCW CW

CCW CW

AM actuators which maybe used on one shaft:

MaxQuantity

Model Per Shaft

AM24(-S) US 4

AM24-SR US 4

Multiple actuators mounted on the same shaft (piggyback).

To other

actuators

To other

actuators

®



97


©


A M

Startup and Checkout ®

Procedure





position.

Push manual override button. (If

clamp is at min signal position, move

damper to fully closed position)











AM24SR US this is 0 to 10 VDC or

0 to 20 mA.



ator move.

Use the manual override button tomove the damper by hand from fully






Expected Response







Signal” position.

Actuator will drive to 0 position

and back to control position


tion




cate.

Damper will go from fully closedto fully open.




Go To Step…


Step 9


ed, actuator begins

to drive

Step 1

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 9

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 9

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 9

Controller output

(actuator input) is

correct. Input

Polarity Correct.

Step 7

Damper movesproperly

Step 8

Defective Actuator.

Replace Actuator -

See Note 2


Go To Step…

No response at all

Step 2Operation is

reversed


toward "Control

Signal Position"

Step 4

Power wiring

corrected, actuator


Step 4

Does not drive

toward “Control

Signal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Reprogram, adjust

repair or replace


Step 1

Find cause ofdamper jam and

repair.

Step 1


requirement and


Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Note 1 Check that the transformer(s) are sized properly.• If a common transformer is used, make sure that polarity is observed on the secondary. This means connect all No. 1 wires to one leg of

the transformer and all No. 2 wires to the other leg of the transformer.• If multiple transformers are used with one control signal, make sure all No. 1 wires are tied together and tied to control signal negative (-).• Controllers and actuators must have separate 24 VAC/VDC power sources.


AM24SR US Electrical check-out procedure



98

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


NM Series – at a glance

NM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®


q

For damper areas up to 18 sq-ft*

Medium Volume Control Dampers.

Damper is mountedthrough a wall with controlshaft exposed, but spacetoo tight to direct couple. Actuator mounted on field-

fabricated plate to controla cone-type VAV damper

KH-8 Crankarm -final position must bevertical when damperis fully open.

Mount actuatorat a 45°angleto allow for full90°crankarmrotation.

ZG-NM3

ZG-NM3

ZG-105

NM24…

ZG-NM4

NM24…

NM24…

N M

2 4 U S ( p

. 1 0 0 )

N M

2 4

- S R U S ( p

. 1 0 2 )

Torque 70 in-lb q q

Power supply 24 VAC q q

Control signal on-off/floating point q

Control signal modulating - 2 to 10 VDC q

Control signal pulse width modulating

Control signal start/span adjustable

Running time 75 to 150 sec for 0 to 70 in-lb q

Running time 150 sec independent of load. q

External direction of rotation switch q q

Angle of rotation limiting (mechanical) q q

External manual override q q

Installation instructions......(p. 104–110) General wiring ..............(p. 106) Start-up and checkout (p. 113)Actuator sizing ..................(p. 105) Special wiring ................(p. 111–112)


Application Methods



99


©


N M

A CLOSER LOOK…

NM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®


UL


q Check damper position from a distance with

clear position indicator.


Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation.

q Enjoy added flexibility with easy mechanical

stop to adjust angle of rotation.



q Simple manual override button helps you get

up and running faster.

q Auxiliary switch accessory (SN1,SN2) is easy to

use, offers feedback or signal for additional device.

q 3 ft. plenum rated cable eases installation

Conduit connector provided: one less detail

to worry about.


actuator life span and reliability, provides constant runningtime independent of load. (Proportional actuators)

Bulk Packaging Offers BigValue for Large Jobs,Stocking Orders.

B e l i m

o ’ sC o m

mit m e n t t o

Q u a

l i t y

S i n c e 19 9 1

I S O 9 0 0 1












100

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


NM24 USOn-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, floating point, 24 V

®

ApplicationFor modulating or on-off control of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actual actuator sizing should be done in accor-dance with the damper manufacturer’s specifications.Control is on-off from an auxiliary contact of a fan motorcontactor, or a manual switch. The direction of rotation isreversible, for use with a floating point type control. Theactuator mounts directly to the damper operating shaft witha universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe universal mounting bracket supplied with the actuatorwill prevent lateral movement of the actuator. The damperactuator is not provided with and does not require any limitswitches, but is protected against overloading. The angle

of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. When reachingthe damper or actuator end position, the motor stops auto-matically. The gears can be manually disengaged by sim-ply pressing down the spring loaded button on the actuatorcover. When this button is pressed down, the damperblades can be adjusted by hand. The position of the actua-tor is indicated by a visual pointer.Auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto theactuator body for signalling and switching functions.

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Damper shaft ExtensionSN1,SN2 Auxiliary switchesZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZG-NM3 Crank arm adaptor kit for ZG-105

ZG-NM4 Crank arm adaptor kitZG-NMSA-1 Shaft adaptor for short shaftsZG-105 Mounting Bracket

Technical Data NM24 US


24 VDC ± 10%



Electrical connection 3 FT, 18 GA plenum rated (UL CL2P)1/2 in. conduit connector


Angle of rotation 0 to 95°, adjustable stops


Damper area (Note 1) 18 Sq Ft

Direction of rotation reversible with switch L/R


Manual override button on actuator

Running time 75 to 150 sec for 0 to 75 in-lb [0 to 8Nm](0 to 90°)




Housing NEMA type 2



Noise level less than 35 db (A)


Quality Standard ISO 9001



Torque min. 70 in-lb, for control of air damperssurfaces up to 18 sq. ft.


UL

Note 1 Damper area is calculated using approximately 4 in-lb/sq ft of damper area. Thisis an average torque requirement for good quality dampers operating under a 1"WC pressure drop. Check damper specifications for exact torque requirements.

2 3/32"[58]

5/32"[9]

3 3/16"

[81]7/32"[5.2]

5 1/2" [140]

6 13/32'' [163]

1 1/16" [27]

7/8"[22]

3/8" to 3/4"

3/8" to 5/8"

D 0 1 6



101


©


N M

NM24 USOn-off, reversible, non-spring return, direct coupled, floating point, 24 V

®

Bulk packaging - NM24.1 US

To have better control of job site inventory and reduce theenvironmental impact of unnecessary packing material, the

NM24 US, is available in a 24 unit bulk pack.

To order use the following part numbers:

Actuator type Bulk pack number

NM24 US NM24.1 (24/box)

T-Type bracketThese are included in the single-actuator

packages and are availableat no extra cost in the bulk

packages upon request.

L-Type bracketThese are included only

in the bulk-packactuator

packages.

NM24 US - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled

type which require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shall

be UL and CSA listed, have a 2 year warranty, and be man-


Standards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manu-

al override on the cover, and be protected from overload at

all angles of rotation. Actuators shall be as manufactured by

Belimo.


a opena closed

The indication of directionis valid for switch position R.

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

NM24 US

L R

a

LineVolts

–

24 VAC Transformer


is valid for switch position R.

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

NM24 US

L R

LineVolts

21 3

Wiring Diagrams

On-Off control of NM24 US Tri-State control of NM24 US

2

3

1Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.

Actuators are provided with color coded wires. Wirenumbers are provided for reference.


Notes:

W 1 5 0

W 1 2 0



102

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


NM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

®

ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actual actuator sizing should be done in accor-

dance with the damper manufacturer’s specifications.

The actuator mounts directly to the damper operatingshaft with a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

OperationThe actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC, 2 to10 V phasecut or, with the addition of a 500Ω resistor, a

4 to 20 mA control input from an electronic controller or

positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal is providedfor position indication or master-slave applications.

A built-in microprocessor automatically tests for the

amount of rotation required to modulate the damper fullyclosed to fully open. The actuator will self-adjust to run

at a consistent running time of 150 seconds, and rescalethe input signal so the entire 8 volt control range is used

to provide maximum resolution of the control system.The microprocessor will also correct for compression of

tight close-off gaskets with age, providing the actuator isnot on its mechanical stops. A functional test of the actu-

ator-damper assembly may be done by pressing in the

manual override button, this will activate the actuatorstest mode and cycle the actuator fully open and closed.

A 2 to 10 VDC feedback (U) is provided with full 8 voltoutput range proportional to the operational rotation of

the damper.

A digital rotation sensing circuit protects the actuator in astall anywhere in its 95°working range without the need

of limit switches.Auxiliary switches are easily fastened directly onto the

actuator body for signalling and switching functions.

AccessoriesAV 10-18 Damper shaft extensionSN1,SN2 Auxiliary switches

ZG-H2 Actuator operator handleZG-NM3 Crank arm adaptor kit for ZG-105

ZG-NM4 Crank arm adaptor kitZG-NMSA-1Shaft adaptor for short shafts


Technical Data NM24-SR US

Power supply 24 VAC, ± 20%, 50/60 Hz 24 VDC, ±10%




Input impedance 100kΩ (0.1 mA), 500Ω

Feedback output 'U' 2 to 10 VDC, 0.7 mA max

Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA plenum rated (UL CL2P) cable,1/2” conduit connector


Torque (Note 1) min 70 in-lb (8 Nm)

Damper area (Note 2) 18 sq ft

Direction of rotation reversible with Switch “L-R”L = CW with an increase in voltageR = CCW with an increase in voltage

Position indication clip on indicator

Manual override button on actuator


Running time (35-95°) 150 seconds independent of max. angle ofrotation or torque

Running time (0-35°) 0-150 seconds proportional to max. angle ofrotation (Note 3)

Run time stability ± 5%


Ambient temperature -4 to +122°F (-20 to +50°C)

Storage temperature -40 to +176°F (-40 to +80°C)

Mounting position not sensitive to position

Housing NEMA 2






Weight 1.8 lbs. (0.8kg.)

Note 1 Minimum torque is produced at minimum voltage, minimum temperature.

Note 2 Damper area is calculated using approximately 4 in-lb/sq ft of damper area. This

is an average torque requirement for good quality dampers operating under a 1"WC pressure drop. Check damper specifications for exact torque requirements.

Note 3 The on board microprocessor measures the actuators full stoke on startup.It then adjusts the actuator speed to ensure 150 second run time for 35°-95°.Below 35°stroke, the speed is constant and run time varies with rotation angle.


Torque min. 70 in-lb, for control of air damperssurfaces up to 18 sq. ft.


UL

2 3/32"[58]

5/32"[9]

3 3/16"

[81]7/32"[5.2]

5 1/2" [140]

6 13/32'' [163]

1 1/16" [27]

7/8"[22]

3/8" to 3/4"

3/8" to 5/8"

D 0 1 6



103


©


N M

NM24-SR USProportional damper actuator, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

®

1

42524 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y 2 to 10V Input

Grn (4) U 2 to 10V Output

NM24-SR US

L R

LineVolts

2 to 10 VDC

Control Signal

(–)(+)

1

425

3

6

24 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



NM24-SR USL R

LineVolts

4 to 20 mA

Control Signal

(–)(+)

2 to 10 VDC

Feedback Signal

(–)(+)

Ω

500Ω

Wiring diagrams

Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled




Standards. Actuators shall have reversing switch and gear

disengagement button on the cover, and be electronically pro-

tected from overload at all angles of rotation. Actuators shall

respond to 2 to 10VDC output relative to position regardless of

the amount of damper rotation. Actuators shall have brushless

DC motor. Run time shall be constant and independent of

torque and angular rotation between 35°and 95°. A 2 to 10

VDC feedback signal shall be provided for position indication

or master-slave applications. Actuators shall be as manufac-

tured by Belimo.

2 to 10 VDC control of NM24-SR US 4 to 20 mA control of NM24-SR US with 2 to 10 VDC

feedback output

2

1

3

4

5

6



Connect actuator common (Wire 1) to Negative (–) legof control circuits only.



The 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA controlsignal to 2 to 10 VDC.

Bulk packaging - NM24-SR.1 US

To have better control of job site inventory and reduce the

environmental impact of unnecessary packing material, theNM24-SR US is available in a 24 unit bulk pack.

To order use the following part numbers:

Actuator type Bulk pack numberNM24-SR NM24-SR.1 (24/box)

Notes:


packages and are available

at no extra cost in the bulkpackages upon request.

L-Type bracketThese are included onlyin the bulk-pack

actuatorpackages.

W 0 9 4

W 0 9 5



104

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



®


1. Turn damper blades to their fully closed position. Slideactuator onto damper shaft. Tighten the nuts on the univer-

sal clamp only finger-tight at this time.

2. Slide anti-rotation mounting strap up under actuator so thatit engages actuator at the center cut-out. Secure to duct-

work with self-tapping screws.

3. Loosen nuts on clamp. Press manual override button.Rotate the clamp to about 5°from the closed position (1/16

to 1/8" between stop and clamp). Tighten the two nuts on

the universal clamp with a 10 mm wrench using 4 to 6 ft-lb oftorque.


5. Mount actuator indoors. If mounted outdoors, use approved

protective enclosure.

1

2 3

4

T- bracket

L-bracket

T- bracket

L-bracket

5°

m i n . 1 .5 ”

3/16"

3/16"



105


©


N M


®

1. Remove the plastic position indicator from the actuator. Slipthe actuator's universal clamp over the damper shaft. Make

sure that the bottom of the actuator (metal side) is towardthe duct and the controls on the cover are accessible.

Place the actuator in the desired mounting position.2. Turn the damper shaft until the blades are fully closed.

3. Hand tighten the two nuts on the NM24 . . universal clamp.

4. Slide the stud of the anti-rotation bracket into the slot in thebottom of the actuator. Bend the strap as needed to sup-

port the rear of the actuator.5. Fasten the strap to the duct with two screws. We recom-

mend No. 8 self tapping sheet metal screws.

6. Loosen the two nuts on the universal clamp. Disengage theactuator gear train by pressing the “manual override button”

(half round black button near the cable entry). Keeping thegears disengaged, and the damper fully closed, rotate the

clamp until it is about 5°from the closed position or approxi-mately 1/16 to 1/8 of an inch between the mechanical stop

and the universal clamp.

7. Tighten the two nuts on the clamp with an 10 mm wrench(Belimo Tool-01). Use 4…6 ft-lb of torque.

The damper is now fully closed but the actuator is 5°from fully

closed. This is called “pre-loading” the actuator. When the

actuator is powered and sent to the closed position: it will put its

full torque on the shaft compressing the edge and blade seals.This ensures that the damper will meet its leakage rating. The actua-

tor is electronically protected from overload and will not be damaged.

Adjustable stopsThe adjustable stops are needed when there is no damper stop

or if you want the damper to halt rotating before it reaches its

stops. The NM24. . actuator can be indefinitely stalled in anyposition without harm.

1. Loosen the two end stops with a No. 2 Phillips head screwdriv-er being careful not to unscrew the captive nut under the slot.

2. Move the stops to the desired position and re-tighten the screws.

Manual overrideThe Belimo NM24. . actuators have a black, half round “manualoverride button” located next to the cable entry. Press this button

and the gear train is disengaged so the damper shaft can be movedmanually. Release the button and the gear train is re-engaged.

Testing the installation without power1. Disengage the gear train with the manual override button

and move the shaft from closed to open to closed. Ensurethat there is no binding and that the damper goes fully

open and closes with 5°of actuator stroke left.

2. Correct any problems and retest.

General Information

Standard Mounting

Preliminary steps1. Belimo actuators should be mounted indoors in a dry, relatively clean environment free from corrosive fumes. If the actuator is

to be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator.2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and

service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft. The damper shaft must extend at least 2" from the duct. If the shaft extends less than 2"or if an obstruction blocks access, the shaft can be extended with the AV 10-18 shaft extension or the ZG NMSA-1 for applications

with minimal mounting area.

For replacement of existing gear train actuators, there are two options:A. From a performance standpoint, it is best to mount the actuator on the damper shaft.

B. If the damper shaft is not accessible, mount the NM24-. . actuator with a ZG-NM4 linkage kit, to convert to a crankarm style

application or the ZG-105 mounting bracket with the ZG-NM3.





(30 ft2) x (4 in-lb/ft2) = (120 in-lb) Belimo AF/AM 133 in-lb/160 in-lb

When rated torque loading of damper is not available:The following general selection guide may be used when it is not possible to obtain the damper manufacturer’s rated torque load-

ing. Note multiplier used for face velocity (feet per minute, FPM).



Air-tight applicationParallel blade/edge seals 7 10.5 14Opposed blade/edge seals 5 7.5 10

Normal close-off applicationParallel blade/no edge seals 4 6 8Opposed blade/no edge seals 3 4.5 6



106

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©



®


enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply beforeattempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect andoverload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only. If using electrical conduit, the attachmentmust be made with flexible conduit.


Transformer(s)The NM24 type actuator requires a 24 VAC class 2 transformer

and draws a maximum of 3.5 VA per actuator. The actuatorenclosure cannot be opened in the field, there are no parts orcomponents to be replaced or repaired.


CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digital con-trollers from a separate power transformer than that used foractuators or other end devices. The power supply design inour actuators and other end devices use half wave rectification.Some controllers use full wave rectification. When these twodifferent types of power supplies are connected to the samepower transformer and the DC commons are connected togeth-er, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes in the fullwave power supply, damaging the controller. Only use a singlepower transformer to power the controller and actuator if youknow the controller power supply uses half wave rectification.

Multiple actuators, one transformerMultiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is less


lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuators are connected to the common leg on the transformer and all No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hotleg.Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformer will

result in erratic operation or failure of the actuator and orcontrols.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the following rulesare followed:1. The transformers are properly sized.2. All No. 1 wires from all actuators are tied together and tied


Wire length for NM type actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in the Fig. 1. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator.Example: 3 actuators, 16 Ga wire

1000 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 333 Ft. Maximum wire run.



12 Ga 2500 Ft. 18 Ga 600 Ft.

14 Ga 1600 Ft. 20 Ga 350 Ft

16 Ga 1000 Ft. 22 Ga 175 Ft

Fig. 1

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theNM24 type actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/or

wire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

The NM24. . proportional actuators have a digital circuit that isdesigned to ignore most unwanted input signals (pickup). Insome situations the pickup may be severe enough to causeerratic running of the actuator. For example, a large inductiveload (high voltage AC wires, motors, etc.) running near thepower or control wiring may cause excessive pickup. To solvethis problem, make one or more of the following changes:1. Run the wire in metallic conduit.2. Reroute the wiring away from the source of pickup.3. Use shielded wire (Belden 8760 or equal). Ground the

shield to an earth ground. Do not connect it to the actuatorcommon.

Reversing switch, “L-R”The NM24-/SR US actuators have a reversing switch on thecover labeled “L-R”. With the switch in position “L”, the actua-tor rotates clockwise with an increase in voltage or current.With the switch in Position “R”, the actuator rotates counter-clockwise with an increase in voltage or current.

The NM24 US, on-off, tri-state actuators when set for switchposition “R”, rotate clockwise when power is applied to wire #3,and counterclockwise when power is applied to wire #2.


the technician a fast and easy way to check the actuator operation without having to switch wires or change settings on the thermostat. When the check-out is complete, make sure the switch is placed back to its original position.




107


©


N M

Installation instructionsOperational Information

®

Additional Operational Information for NM24-SR US Proportional Actuators

Controller types

Belimo NM24-SR US actuator is compatible with virtually allelectronic controllers using a 2 to 10 VDC control signal. Andwill work with a 4 to 20 mA signal with the addition of a 500 Ω

resistor.

Microprocessor controlled brushless DC motorAn on board microprocessor monitors operation and controls abrushless DC motor. It also performs a self test upon power up.

Overload protectionThe Belimo NM24-SR US actuator is protected from overloadat all angles of rotation. The on board microprocessor con-stantly monitors the rotation of the DC drive motor inside theactuator and stops the pulses to the motor when it senses astall condition. The DC motor remains energized and produces

full rated torque to the load. This helps ensure that dampersare fully closed and that edge and blade seals are always prop-erly compressed.

Brushless DC motor operationBelimo's brushless DC motor spins by reversing the poles ofstationary electromagnets housed inside rotating permanentmagnets. The electromagnetic poles are switched by a micro-processor and a special ASIC (Application Specific IntegratedCircuit) developed by Belimo. Unlike the conventional DCmotor, there are no brushes to wear or commutators to foul.

Motor position detectionBelimo Brushless DC motors do not use potentiometers for posi-tioning. Inside the motor are three "Hall Effect" sensors. These

sensors detect the spinning rotor and send pulses to the micro-processor which counts the pulses and calculates the position.

Initialization or function checkWhen a power source is applied to terminal 1 and 2 the motorcarries out an initialization of the actuator. If required, a functioncheck can also be made after connection of the supply voltageby pressing in the manual override button and then releasing it.The purpose of this initialization is to determine the mechanicalangle of rotation and to adapt the running time to the angle ofrotation. The function check can also be used to verify that thedamper, and linkage (if mounted) are running free and are cor-rectly adjusted.

The function check makes the motor run first to the clockwise

or counter-clockwise stop, depending on the selector switchposition. Thereafter it runs to the opposite stop. During thisoperation the output (U5) supplies 2 VDC.

Re-initializationWhenever the “manual override button” is pressed andreleased and the actuator is powered, the microprocessor will“re-initialize”. See “Initialization or function check” above.

Motor speed and run timeThe microprocessor also controls the speed of the motor. In aconventional DC motor, increased torque slows the motorspeed. Since the microprocessor determines the total rotationduring initialization, it can calculate how fast to turn the motorto insure a 150 second run time independent of the total rota-

tion over a range of 35-95°. Below 35°, the motor runs at a con-stant speed and the run time is proportional to the angle.

Input Resolution

During initialization the microprocessor determines the maxi-mum rotation angle. It then divides this angle by the workingspan of the input signal and calculates how many degrees totravel for each volt change in control signal or pulse length.This means that the working span (Example: 8 V for a 2 to 10VDC Signal) is consistent for any angle of maximum rotationdown to as low as 35°. This greatly simplifies engineering andcheckout when dampers have differing maximum rotations.

Total Rotation Run Time Total Rotation Run Time95° 150 Sec. 35° 150 Sec.75° 150 Sec. 15° 64 Sec.55° 150 Sec. 5° 21 Sec.

Monitoring and self-adjustment of close-off position

The purpose of this function is to correct the mechanical toler-ances within 4% which can change over time. It assures thatthe actuator always presses the damper blade with maximumpressure onto the seal. The end positions are automaticallychecked as soon as the actuator position comes within 3% ofthe total angle of rotation, at full open or full closed.

If the actuator registers a change of the end position of ≤ 4%,the angle of rotation will be modified. If the actuator registers achange of the end position > 4%, the actuator will consider it anerror and not modify the angle of rotation.

The actuator will self-adjust until it reaches its mechanical stops.

Accessories

AV 10-18 Shaft extensionTool-01 10 mm wrench for tightening the universal clamp's nuts.Tool-03 #10 tamper proof Torx screwdriver required for

installation of ZG-NM3 or ZG-NM4 linkage kits.SGA24 Minimum and/or manual positioner (electronic) In

NEMA 4 enclosure for surface mounting.SGF24 Minimum and/or manual positioner (electronic)

For flush panel mounting.SN1 Auxiliary Switch, 1 x SPDTSN2 Auxiliary Switch, 2 x SPDTZG-NM4 Linkage kit. Includes 1 crankarm for the actuator,

2 ball joints and 1 mounting plate for the actuator.Customer needs to supply 5/16" connecting rod anda crank arm for the damper.

ZG-NM3 Linkage kit for use with the ZG-105 mounting

bracket. Includes 1 crankarm for the actuatorand 2 ball joints.

ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft adaptor for short shaftsZG-H2 Actuator operator handle A heavy gauge steel

handle which attaches to the universal clamp.For use where frequent manual positioning ofdampers is required.

ZG-105 Mounting bracket, when direct coupled mountingis not possible.



108

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Mounting Instructions

1. Remove pointer assembly from the actuator. Press down

the manual override button and rotate the actuator fullycounter-clockwise.

2. Invert SN . switch and turn the driver disk fully clockwise as

indicated.

3. Slide SN . switch onto actuator and check for the correct

mating of the driver disk to the universal clamp. Securewith screw.

4. Adjust switch dials as necessary

5. Remount the white plastic pointer only onto SN . switch.

SN1, SN2 Auxiliary switchesFor the direct coupled actuator NM 2…

OperationThe SN1 and SN2 auxiliary switches are used to indicatewhen a desired position of a damper is reached or to interface

additional controls for a specific control sequence. They aremodular units that mount directly onto the NM type actuators

and held in place with a prefitted screw. A driver disk isattached to the actuator clamp and offers direct transmission

of the actuator position to the microswitch operating cams.

The switching points can be set over the full scale of 0 to 10simply by adjusting the slotted discs.

NOTE: will not mount to NM actuators manufactured priorto May 1994

Technical Data SN1 SN2

No. of switches 1xSPDT 2xSPDT

Switching capacity 6 A (2.5A) 250 VAC

Switching point adjustable over full actuator rotation0 to 10. Pre-setting with scale possible.

Electrical connection 3 ft. 18 GA cable [1 m long 0.75mm2]





Housing material rating UL 94-V0 (flammability rating)

Weight 4 oz [125 g] 5.6 oz [175 g]

®

Wiring Diagrams

SN2

q

q

q

q

q

q

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

SN1

q

q

q

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

1

2 3 4 5

Voltage Resistive Inductive120 6.0 A 5.0 A250 6.0 A 2.5 A



109


©


N M

AccessoriesAdditional accessories

®

ZG-H2 Actuator Operator Handle

Used when it is desirable to move or adjust damper by hand.Increases leverage and precision during set-up and testing.

ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft adaptor

Used on 1/2" diameter shafts that are shorter than 3/4" andmounting space is minimal.

AV 10-18 Shaft Extension

For damper shafts 3/8 to 11/16 in [10 to 18] dia or 3/8 to 9/16in [10 to 14] square.

ZG-NM3 - Crank arm adaptor kit

For use when the actuator cannot be mounted directly to the

damper shaft. Similar to ZG-NM4 (below) but without mountingplate. To be used with ZG-105 (right).

ZG-105 Mounting Bracket

ZG-NM4 - Crank arm adaptor kit

For use when the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft.

Mounting Instructions for ZG-NM4 Linkage Kit

1. Remove the four retaining screws ➀ in the base of the

actuator.

Note: A # 10 tamper-proof Torx screwdriver is required.2. Install the mounting plate ➁ to the base of the actuator

using the four retaining screws from step #3.

3. Mount the actuator assembly in a convenient location by

the damper.

4. Insert the crankarm assembly ➂ into the universal clamp

and tighten in the desired position.

5. Adjust the crank arm linkage for proper damper operation

SGA24/SGF24

Minimum and/or manual positioner (electronic), SGA24 isenclosed in a NEMA 4 housing. The SGF24 is for flush panel

mounting.

➀

➁

➂(by others)

SGA24SGF24



110

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Non-Direct Mounting Methods®

Actuator mounted on a field-fabricated 16 ga. plate to con-trol a cone-type VAV damper

Universal mounting bracket or a field-fabricated 16 ga.angle iron or plate. Used when there is little clearancebetween the damper shaft and the wall.

Use this method when there is little clearance between thedamper shaft and the wall.

Damper is mounted through a wallwith control shaft exposed, butspace too tight to direct couple.

KH-8 Crankarm - finalposition must be verticalwhen damper is fullyopen.

Mount actuator ata 45° angle toallow for full 90°crankarm rotation.

ZG-NM3

ZG-NM3

ZG-105

NM24…

ZG-NM4

NM24…

NM24…



111


©


N M

Special Wiring DiagramsNM24-SR US

®

Override open of a NM24-SR US Both the override closedand the override open circuit can be combined on one actua-tor. Wire the relay contacts in series. Determine which signal

has the highest precedence and connect that relay electricallyclosest to the actuator.

Minimum position control of NM24-SR US from a voltagesignal and through a SGA24/SGF24 positioner.

Override closed of a NM24-SR US.

Actuator drives to the high signal position when 24VAChot is connected to wire 3 (SPDT relay energized). AdjustReversing Switch (L-R) so the high signal positions the

damper to its desired position.CAUTION: Do not short 24 VAC hot to the (+) leg of thecontrol signal or the controller may be damaged.

Input: NM24-SR US - 2 to 10 VDC

Actuator drives to the low signal position when there is nosignal to wire 3 (SPST relay energized). Adjust reversingswitch (L-R) so the low signal positions the damper in itsdesired end position.

SGA24 (NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount) areidentical electrically. Both act as a manual positionerwhen no signal is present on terminal 4. Both act as aminimum positioner when there is a signal on terminal 4

(output on terminal 3 is either the control signal or theknob setting, whichever is higher).

q

21

8

7 (–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

SPST

Line

Volts

Control Signal

Override


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input


NM24-SR US

c

qq

q

q q

2

7

5

7

1

6

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Control Signal

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input


NM24-SR US

Override “Open”

Circuit

c

q

q

q

q

q

q

2

9

1

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input


NM24-SR US

Control Signal

SPDT

SGA24SGF24

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Output

4 Control Input

2

1

3


Actuators are provided with color coded wires. Wire num-bers are provided for reference.

Connect actuator common (wire 1) to negative (–) leg ofcontrol circuits only.

NM24-SR US: Up to 4 actuators may be connected in par-allel. With 4 actuators wired to one 500Ω resistor, a +2%shift of control signal may be required. Power consump-tion must be observed.

The 500Ω resistor converts the 4 to 20 mA control signalto 2 to 10 VDC.

4

5

6

7

8

9

Notes:

Ω



112

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Special Wiring DiagramsNM24-SR US

®



SGA24 (NEMA 4 enclosure and SGF24 (panel mount)are identical electrically. Both act as a manual positionerwhen no signal is present on terminal 4. Both act as aminimum positioner when there is a signal on terminal 4(output on terminal 3 is either the control signal or theknob setting, whichever is higher).


Input: NM24-SR US - 2 to 10 VDC

q

q q

q

2

2

3

4

5

5

1

1

4

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

Control

Signal

5Control

Signal

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input


NM24-SR USOverride

Circuit

No. 1

c

q

q

SPST

q q

34

(–)(+)

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Output

4 Control Input

SGA24SGF24

Override

Circuit

No.2

c

SPDT

R1

R2

IMPORTANT Observe polarity on secondary of trans-formers. Connect all actuator Wire 1 and Control Signal(–) to one leg of the transformer (bold line) and all actua-tor Wire 2 to the other leg of the transformer. Incorrectpolarity can damage controller or cause erratic operation.

Set reversing switch (L-R) as required by control logic.

When individual transformers are used for each actuator,the hot line from the transformer only goes to one actua-tor. The common wire 1 of all actuators must be wiredtogether.

q

q

q

2

6

7

8

1

68

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

To other

actuators

1

8

LineVolts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input


NM24-SR US

q

q

q

q

7

(–)(+)

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y Input


NM24-SR US

Minimum position control with override circuits of NM24-SR US from a voltage signal and through a SGA24/SGF24positioner.




Energized Energized Close (0 VDC position)

De-energized Energized Open (max VDC position)


Notes:



113


©


N M

Startup and CheckoutInstructions For NM24-SR US

®

Procedure

Connect signal Input to wires 1 & 3.

Connect signal output (if used) to

wires 1 & 4

Connect 24 VAC/VDC power to

Wires 1 & 2


problems. Note 1



turned all the way left or right. Press

“Override Button” all the way down

and release








Disconnect signal input from Wires

No. 1 & 3




NM24-SR this is 2 to 10 VDC or

4 to 20 mA (with 500Ω resistor).

Disconnect power from Wire No. 2.

Reconnect signal input to Wires No.1 & 3.

Reconnect power to Wire No. 2

Actuator does not drive




Expected Response

Actuator drives to the “No

Signal” position (usually closed),

then to the “Maximum Signal”

position (usually open) then to

the “Control Signal” position.






Signal” position (usually closed),

then to the “Maximum Signal”




tion


Signal” position




cate.


Signal” position (usually closed),then to the “Maximum Signal”



Defective actuator

Actuator RespondsGo To Step ...

Actuator operates

properly

Step 9


ed, actuator begins

to drive

Step 1

Actuator operates

properly

Step 9

Actuator operates

properly

Step 9

Step 6

Controller output

(actuator input) is

correct. Input

Polarity Correct.

Step 7

Actuator operates

properlyStep 9

No ResponseGo To Step

No response at all

Step 2Operation is

reversed


toward "Control

Signal Position"

Step 4

Power wiring

corrected, actuator


Step 8

Does not drive

toward “Control

Signal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Step 8

Reprogram, adjust

repair or replace


Step 7

Step 8

Replace actuator

Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.




• If multiple transformers are used with one control signal, make sure all No. 1 wires are tied together and tied to controlsignal negative (-).


NM24-SR US



114

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


LM Series Direct Coupled Actuator

Areas of Application

Small Yet Powerful

q Minimum 35 in-lb torque in a compact package.For damper areas up to 8 sq-ft*.

®

Torque: 35 in-lb q q q q q q q 18 18 18

Power supply : 24 VAC/DC q q q q q q q q q q

Control signal: on-off/floating point q q q q q q

Control signal: proportional 2 to 10 VDC q q q q

Feedback signal: 2 to 10 VDC q

10kΩ feedback potentiometer q

5kΩ feedback potentiometer q

Run time, 80 to 110 sec for 0 to 35 in-lb q q q q q q q

Run time, 25 to 35 sec for 0 to 18 in-lb q q q

Left/Right rotation switch q q q q q q q q

Angle of rotation limiting (mechanical) q q q q q q q q

Angle of rotation limiting (electronic) q q

Plenum rated cable, 18 GA q q q q q q

Screw terminal strip q q q q

Manual override push-button q q q q q q q q q q

Built-in auxiliary switch q

Installation instructions......(p. 124–127) General wiring ..............(p. 126) Start-up and checkout (p. 129)Actuator sizing ..................(p. 125) Special wiring ................(p. 128)


LM Series – at a glance L M

2 4 - 3 U S

( p . 1 1 6 )

L M 2 4 -

3 - T

U S

( p . 1 1 6 )

L M 2 4 - S

U S

( p . 1 2 0 )

L M 2 4 -

1 0 P U

S ( p . 1 2 0 )

L M 2 4 -

5 P 0 - T

U S

( p . 1 2 0 )

L M

2 4 - S R

- 2 . 0

U S

( p . 1

1 8 )

L M 2 4 - S R

- T - 2 . 0 U S

( p .

1 1 8 )

L M C 2 4 U S

( p . 1 2 2 )

L M C 2 4 - S R

U S

( p . 1 2 2

)

L M C 2 4 -

S R

- T U

S ( p . 1 2

2 )

Rack and pinion type actuatorreplaced by direct coupled LM.

Replacement LM24 compatiblewith existing control system.

Replacement Belimoactuator (LM type)direct couples to VAVBy-Pass damper shaft.

Existing pneumaticactuator requires linkage.

VAV Units and Small Zone Dampers Quiet Plus ®

VAVterminal unit byWarren Technology



115


©


L M


UL

q Brushless DC Motor for added accuracy

and controllability.


q Check damper position from a distance with

clear position indication.


Belimo is overload-proof throughout rotation.

q Enjoy added flexibility with easy mechanical

stops to adjust angle of rotation.

(LM24-SR-2.0 US has electronic rotation limiting.)

q Consistent running time independent of load.

q Easily accessible manual override push-button

helps you pre-tension damper blades.



q 3 ft. plenum rated cable eases installation

(external terminal strip also available)

Bulk Packaging Offers Big Valuefor Large Jobs, Stocking Orders.

LM Series Direct Coupled Actuator ®

©



Extensive product range. Competitive project pricing. Application assistance.Same-day shipments. Free technical support. Five year warranty.








o ’ sC o m

mit m e n t t o

Q u a

l i t y

S i n c e 19 9 1

I S O 9 0 0 1



116

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ApplicationFor on-off and floating point control of dampers in HVAC sys-tems. Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the

damper manufacturer’s specifications. The actuator mountsdirectly to the damper operating shaft with a universal V-bolt

clamp assembly.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require any limitswitches, but is electronically protected against overload. The

angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. When reachingthe damper or actuator end position, the actuator automatically

stops. The gears can be manually disengaged with a button on

the actuator cover. The position of the actuator is indicated bya visual pointer. The anti-rotation strap supplied with the actua-

tor will prevent lateral movement.

The LM24-3 US and LM24-3-T US actuators use a BrushlessDC motor, which is controlled by an Application Specific

Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and controls the

actuator’s rotation and provides a digital rotation sensing (DRS)function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall condition.

Accessories11533 T-type anti-rotation bracket

22065 L-type anti-rotation bracket (included)ZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shafts

Tool-02 8 mm wrench

LM24-3 USOn-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V


Torque min. 35 in-lb, for control of damper surfaces up to 8 sq ft.

LM24-3 USLM24-3-T US

LM24-3 US LM24-3-T US


UL

®

Technical Data LM24… on-off/floating point




Electrical connection 3 ft, 18 GA, UL CL2P plenum cable


Input impedance 3900Ω

Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stops

Torque min 35 in-lb [4 Nm], Independent of load

Direction of rotation reversible w/switch CW/CCW(not on “-T” models)

Position indication clip-on indicator (not on “-T” models)

Running time 95 seconds



Ambient temperature -22°F to +122°F [-30°C to +50°C]Storage temperature -40°F to +176°F [-40°C to +80°C]

Housing type NEMA type 2 (-T models NEMA 1)

Housing material rating UL94-5V



Agency listings UL873 listed, CSA 22.2 No. 24 certified, CE



LM24-3-T.1 US

Electrical connection Screw terminal (for 26 to 14 GA wire)Housing NEMA type 1

Direction of rotation Reverse wires terminals 2 and 3

©

L R

2 0 %

1 0 0 %

1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85"[21.5]

1.28"[32.5]

2.56"[65]

2.32"[58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D 0 1 4



117


©


L M

13

224 VAC Transformer

a opena closed


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24-3-(T) US

L R

a

LineVolts

12

3

6

24 VAC Transformer


Blk (1) CommonRed (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24-3 US

CCW CW

LineVolts

LM24-3 USOn-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

LM24… on-off/floating - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled




Standards. Actuators shall have Brushless DC motor tech-

nology. Actuators shall have reversing switch and manual


angles of rotation. If required, actuator will be provided with

screw terminal strip for electrical connections (LM24-3-T US).


On-off control

LineVolts

1 Common

2 +

3 +

24 VAC Transformer

LM24-3-T US

6

51

2

Floating point or on-off control of LM24-3-T US

3

2

5

6




The LM24-3-T US actuators are provided with a num-bered screw terminal strip instead of cable.

Switch wires 2 and 3 to change rotation direction ofLM24-3-T US (does not have CW/CCW external switch).


Bulk packaging

Bulk Pack No. Actuator Type Quantity/Pack

LM24-3.1 US LM24-3 US 32

LM24-3-T.1 US LM24-3-T US 48

®

Notes


packages and are availableat no extra cost in the bulk

packages upon request.

L-Type anti-rotation bracket.

Included witheach bulk packaged

actuator. Partnumber: 22065

W 0 8 0

W 0 8 2

W 0 8 1


environmental impact of unnecessary packing material.



118

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


LM24-SR(-T)-2.0 USProportional control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

ApplicationFor proportional modulation of dampers in HVAC systems.

Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the dampermanufacturer’s specifications. The actuator mounts directly to

the damper operating shaft with a universal V-bolt clampassembly. The actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10 VDC

or, with the addition of a 500 Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA input sig-nal from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDC

feedback signal is provided for position indication or master

slave applications. (Not available on “-T” versions)The LM24-SR-2.0 US provides an electronic angle of rotation

adjustment to limit the actuators rotation 20% to 100% while stillusing the full input signal and feedback control range. (Not

available on LM24-SR-T-2.0 US)

OperationThe anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuator will prevent lat-eral movement of the actuator. The damper actuator is not pro-

vided with and does not require any limit switches, but is pro-tected electronically against overload. The angle of rotation is

mechanically limited to 95°. When reaching the damper or actu-

ator end position, the actuator automatically stops. The gearscan be manually disengaged by pressing a button on the actua-

tor cover. The position of the actuator is indicated by a visualpointer.

The LM24-SR-2.0 US and LM24-SR-T-2.0 US actuators use aBrushless DC motor, which is controlled by an Application Specific

Integrated Circuit (ASIC). The ASIC monitors and controls the

actuator’s rotation and provides a digital rotation sensing (DRS)function to prevent damage to the actuator in a stall condition.

Accessories11533 T-type anti-rotation bracket

22065 L-type anti-rotation bracket (included)ZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shafts

Tool-02 8 mm wrenchZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 4 to 20 mA



LM24-SR-2.0 USLM24-SR-T-2.0 US

®

LM24-SR-T-2.0 USLM24-SR-2.0 US


U

L

©

Technical Data LM24-SR-2.0 US




Electrical connection LM24-SR-2.0 US: 3 ft, 18 GA, ULCL2P plenum cable




Feedback output ‘U’ 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.7 mA )(not available on LM24-SR-T-2.0 US

Angle of rotation max 95°, electronically adjustable20 to 100% on LM24-SR-2.0 US

Torque min 35 in-lb, Independent of load

Direction of rotation reversible with switch CW/CCWCW = with an increase in voltageCCW = with an increase in voltage


Running time 95 seconds





Housing type NEMA type 2 (-T models Nema type1)

Housing material rating UL 94-5V



Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA 22..2 No. 24 certified, CE



LM24-SR-T-2.0.1 US

Electrical connection Screw terminals (for 26 to 14 GA wire)

Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stopsHousing NEMA type 1

Feedback No feedback with the LM24-SR-T-2.0 US

L R

2 0 %

1 0 0 %

1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85"[21.5]

1.28"[32.5]

2.56"[65]

2.32"[58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D 0 1 4



119


©


L M

LM24-SR(-T)-2.0 USProportional control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, for 2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control signal

12

724 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LM24-SR-2.0 US

CCW CW

LineVolts

2 to 10 VDCControl Signal


(–)(+)

(–)(+)

6

12

724 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LM24-SR-2.0 US

CCW CW

LineVolts



(–)(+)

(–)(+)

6

8Ω

500Ω

2 to 10 VDC control of LM24-SR-2.0 US

4 to 20 mA control of LM24-SR-2.0 US with 2 to 10 VDCfeedback output

2

4

5

6

7

8

1Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.


The LM24-SR-T-2.0 US is provided a screw terminalinstead of cable.

The LM24-SR-T-2.0 US does not have feedback.



A 500Ω resistor (ZG-R01) must be added for 4 to 20mA control.

14

724 VAC Transformer

1 Common2 + Hot

3 Y 2 to 10V Input

LM24-SR-T-2.0 US

CCW CW

LineVolts

4 to 20 mA

Control Signal

w/500Ω resistor

(–)(+)

6

8Ω

500Ω2 to 10 VDC

5

2 to 10 VDC and 4 to 20 mA control of LM24-SR-T-2.0 US

®

Bulk packaging LM24SR-2.0 US and LM24SR-T-2.0 US

LM24-SR(-T) 2.0 US - Typical Specification:

Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupledtype which require no crank arm and linkage. Actuators shall



Standards. Actuators shall have Brushless DC motor.

Actuators shall have reversing switch and gear disengage-

ment button on the cover, and be electronically protected from

overload at all angles of rotation. Actuators shall respond to 2

to 10VDC output relative to position regardless of the amount

of damper rotation. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback signal shall be

provided for position indication or master-slave applications.


An electronic angle of rotation adjustment shall be provided to

reduce the actuators rotation from 100 to 20% while still using

the full input signal and feedback control range. (LM24-SR US)If required, actuator will be provided with screw terminal strip for

electrical connections (LM24-SR-T US).

Notes


LM24-SR-2.0.1 US LM24-SR-2.0 US 32

LM24-SR-T.-2.0.1 US LM24-SR-T-2.0 US 48

L-Type anti-rotation bracket.Included witheach bulk packaged

actuator. Part

number: 22065

T-Type bracketThese are included in the single-actuatorpackages and are available

at no extra cost in the bulkpackages upon request.

W 0 8 3

W 0 8 4

W 0 8 5


environmental impact of unnecessary packing material.



120

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ApplicationFor on-off and floating point control of dampers in HVAC sys-

tems. Actuator sizing should be done in accordance with the

damper manufacturer’s specifications. The actuator mountsdirectly to the damper operating shaft with a universal V-bolt

clamp assembly.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require any

limit switches, but is electronically protected against overload.

The angle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. Whenreaching the damper or actuator end position, the actuator

automatically stops. The gears can be manually disengagedwith a button on the actuator cover. The position of the actua-

tor is indicated by a visual pointer. The anti-rotation strap sup-

plied with the actuator will prevent lateral movement.

AccessoriesLM-P T-type anti-rotation bracket

ZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shaftsTool-02 8 mm wrench

LM24 USOn-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V


LM24 USLM24-S US

LM24-10P USLM24-5P0-T USLM24-T US

LM24-S US LM24-T US


UL

Technical Data LM24… on-off/floating pointPower supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 Hz 24 VDC ±10%







Direction of rotation reversible w/switch L/R (not on “-T” models)







Housing type NEMA type 2 (-T models NEMA 1)







LM24-S USAuxiliary switch Adj. 0°to 95°, SPDT 6 A (2.5A) @ 24 VAC

LM24-10P US

Feedback 10 kΩ, 1W potentiometer

LM24-5P0-T.1 US (bulk pack only)

Feedback 5 kΩ, 1W potentiometer

Housing NEMA type 1


LM24-T.1 US (bulk pack only)

Electrical connection Screw terminal (for 26 to 14 GA wire)Housing NEMA type 1


®


1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85"[21.5]

1.28"[32.5]

2.56"[65]

2.32"[58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D 0 1 5



121


©


L M

1

4

3224 VAC Transformer

a open

a closed


is valid for switch position R.

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24 (-S) US

LM24-10P US

L R

a

LineVolts

12

3

6

4

24 VAC Transformer


Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LM24 (-S) USLM24-10P US

L R

LineVolts

LM24-S US

S1

S2

S3

NC

NO0° to 95°

LM24 USOn-off/ floating point control, non-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V

LM24… on-off/floating - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled






angles of rotation. If required, actuator will be provided with

screw terminal strip for electrical connections (LM24-T US and

LM24-5P0-T US). If required, one adjustable SPDT auxiliary

switch shall be provided (LM24-S US). If required, actuators shall

be provided with a built-in 10 kΩ feedback potentiometer (LM24-

10P US) or 5kΩ (LM24-5P0-T). Actuators shall be as manufac-

tured by Belimo.

On-off control

LineVolts

1 Common

2 +

3 +

24 VAC Transformer

LM24-T US

LM24-5P0-T US

64

51

2

3

LM24-10P US

LM24-5P0-T US

0

10/5

10kΩ /5kΩ

Feedbackpotentiometer

7

5

4

7

Org (P1)

Blue (P2)

Yel (P3)

Floating point or on-off control of LM24-T US andLM24-5P0-T US

Feedback potentiometer wiring for LM24-10P US andLM24-5P0-T US

Auxiliary switch wiring for LM24-S US

3

2

4

5

6

7

1 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.


For position indication, the LM24-10P US is provided witha 10 kΩ feedback potentiometer and the LM24-5P0-T USis provided with a 5 kΩ feedback potentiometer.

The LM24-T US and LM24-5P0-T US are provided witha numbered screw terminal strip instead of cable.

Switch wires 2 and 3 to change rotation direction ofLM24-T US and LM24-5P0-T US (does not have L/Rexternal switch).

Value based on resistance between (P1) and (P2).indicates direction of rotation of actuator.


Bulk packaging LM24 on-off/floating


LM24.1 US LM24 US 32

LM24-T.1 US LM24-T US 48

LM24-5P0-T.1 US LM24-5P0-T US 48

L-Type anti-rotation bracket. Included witheach actuator.

Notes

®

W 0 8 6

W 0 8 9

W 0 8 7

W 0 8 8

W 0 9 0



122

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ApplicationFor on-off and floating point control of dampers in HVAC sys-tems (LMC24 US). For proportional modulation of dampers inHVAC systems (LMC24-SR-T US). Actuator sizing should bedone in accordance with the damper manufacturer’s specifica-tions. The actuator mounts directly to the damper operatingshaft with a universal V-bolt clamp assembly.

The LMC24-SR-T US actuator operates in response to a 2 to 10VDC or, with the addition of a 500 Ω resistor, a 4 to 20 mA inputsignal from an electronic controller or positioner. A 2 to 10 VDCfeedback signal is provided for position indication or master

slave applications. The LMC24-SR US provides an electronicangle of rotation adjustment (not available in the LMC24-SR-T US) tolimit the actuators rotation 20% to 100% while still using the fullinput signal and feedback control range.

OperationThe actuator is not provided with and does not require any limitswitches, but is electronically protected against overload. Theangle of rotation is mechanically limited to 95°. When reachingthe damper or actuator end position, the actuator automaticallystops. The gears can be manually disengaged with a button onthe actuator cover. The position of the actuator is indicated by avisual pointer. The anti-rotation strap supplied with the actuatorwill prevent lateral movement.

AccessoriesLM-P T-type anti-rotation bracket

IRM-100 Input scaling module (For LMC24-SR-T US only)ZG-LMSA Shaft adaptor for short shaftsPTA-250 Pulse width modulating interface

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)SGA24 Min. and/or manual positioner in NEMA 4 housing

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)SGF24 Min. and/or manual positioner for flush panel mount

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)Tool-02 8 mm wrench

ZAD24 Digital position indication (For LMC24-SR-T US only)ZG-R01 500Ω resistor for 4 to 20 mA

(For LMC24-SR-T US only)

LMC24 (SR) USNon-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, 25 to 35 sec. running time

Torque min. 18 in-lb, for control of damper surfaces up to 4.5 sq ft.

LMC24 US (on/off, floating)LMC24-SR US (proportional)

LMC24-SR-T US (proportional)

LMC24 US LMC24-SR US


UL

®

Technical Data LMC24 (-SR) US…Power supply 24 VAC ±20% 50/60 Hz 24 VDC ±10%

Power consumption LMC24 US 2.0 WLMC24-SR(-T) US 2.5 W

Transformer sizing LMC24 US 3 VALMC24-SR(-T) US 4 VA



Angle of rotation max 95°, adjust. with mechanical stops(LMC24 US), electronically adjustable20 to 100% on LMC24-SR US only


Operating range 2 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA (LMC24-SR(-T) US)

Input impedance 100 kΩ (0.1 mA), 500Ω (LMC24-SR(-T)US)

Feedback output ‘U’ 2 to 10 VDC (max. 0.7 mA )(LMC24-SR-T US)

Direction of rotation reversible with switch “CCW-CW”LMC24-SR-T US:CW with a decrease in voltageCCW with a decrease in voltage














LMC24-SR-T US

Electrical connection Screw terminals (for 26 to 14 GA wire)


Housing NEMA type 1Feedback No feedback with the LMC24-SR-T US

Note: Actuators do not have Brushless DC Motor


1

1

0

0

3.47" [88]

4.53" [115]

3.68" [93.5]0.85"[21.5]

1.28"[32.5]

2.56"[65]

2.32"[58.9]

1/4" to 5/8" [6 to 16]

1/4" to 7/16" [6 to 11]

D 0 1 5



123


©


L M

13

224 VAC Transformer

a open

a closed



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LMC24 US

CCW CW

a

Line

Volts

1 2

324 VAC Transformer



Blk (1) Common

Red (2) +

Wht (3) +

LMC24 US

CCW CW

LineVolts

LMC24 (SR) USNon-spring return, direct coupled, 24 V, 25 to 35 sec. running time

LMC24… - Typical Specification:Control damper actuators shall be electronic direct coupled






angles of rotation. Actuator shall have a nominal running time

of 30 seconds for 95° rotation. Proportional actuators shall

respond to 2 to 10VDC output relative to position regardless ofthe amount of damper rotation. A 2 to 10 VDC feedback sig-

nal shall be provided for position indication or master-slave

applications. An electronic angle of rotation adjustment

(LMC24-SR US only) shall be provided to reduce the actuators

rotation from 100 to 20% while still using the full input signal

and feedback control range. Actuators shall be as manufac-

tured by Belimo.

On-off control

3

2

4

5

6


Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC



A 500Ω resistor (ZG-R01) must be added for 4 to 20 mAcontrol.

LMC24-SR-T US does not have a cable. Numbersshown are terminal numbers.


L-Type anti-rotation bracket. Included with

each actuator.

®

Notes

13

224 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) CommonRed (2) + Hot



LMC24-SR(-T) US

CCW CW

LineVolts

2 to 10 VDC

Control Signal


(–)(+)

(–)(+)

4

6

13

224 VAC Transformer

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot



LMC24-SR(-T) US

CCW CW

LineVolts

4 to 20 mA

Control Signal

2 to 10 VDC

Feedback Signal

(–)(+)

(–)(+)

4

65Ω

500Ω

2 to 10 VDC control of LMC24-SR(-T) US

4 to 20 mA control of LMC24-SR(-T) US with 2 to 10 VDCfeedback output

W 1 5 1

W 1 5 3

W 1 5 2

W 1 5 4



124

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Installation InstructionsQuick-mount visual instructions

®

1. Turn damper blade to its fully closed position.

2. With manual override button depressed, rotate actuatorclamp to about 1/16” - 1/8” between actuator stop and

clamp, depending on damper seal design. Slide actuator

over shaft and finger-tighten nuts.

3. Slide anti-rotation bracket up under actuator engaging cen-ter cut-out on actuator back. Secure bracket with self-tap-

ping screws. Tighten the two nuts on the universal clamp with8 mm wrench, 3-5 ft-lb torque. (On dampers with edge seals,

actuator will compress damper blades when reaching end posi-tion for air-tight damper.)


1

2 3

4

L-bracket

L-bracket

m i n . 1 .5 ” [ 3 8 ]




125


©


L M

Installation InstructionsActuator sizing/preliminary steps


be mounted outdoors, a protective enclosure must be used to shield the actuator. (See Belimo Mechanical Accessories Doc. 5.2)

2. For new construction work, order dampers with extended shafts. Instruct the installing contractor to allow space for mounting and

service of the Belimo actuator on the shaft.3. The LM Series actuator requires a minimum shaft length of 1.5”.

Use the ZG-LMSA for short shaft installations on 1/2” diameter shafts.


Consult the damper manufacturer for rated torque loading. Call your Belimo representative for help in determining torque loadingwith linkage applications.

Damper Area x Rated Torque Loading of Damper = Total in-lb Required(2 ft2) x (4 in-lb/ft2) = (8 in-lb) Belimo LM 35 in-lb

When rated loading of damper is not available:The following general selection guide may be used when it is not possible to obtain the damper manufacturer’s rated torque loading.

Note multiplier for face velocity (feet per minute, FPM).



Air-tight applicationRound blade/edge seals 10 15 20Parallel blade/edge seals 7 10.5 14

Opposed blade/edge seals 5 7.5 10

Normal close-off applicationRound blade/metal seat 5 7.5 10Parallel blade/no edge seals 4 6 8

Opposed blade/no edge seals 3 4.5 6

®


4” .09

5” .19

6” .20

7” .27

8” .35

9” .44


10” .55

11” .66

12” .79

14” 1.07

16” 1.40

18” 1.77

Formula for conversion of duct diameter area: A = π r2

144

CONVERSION OF DUCT DIAMETER AREA

(π = 3.14, r = radius)



126

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


0 1


®

WARNING The wiring technician must be trained and experi-enced with electronic circuits. Disconnect power supply beforeattempting any wiring connections or changes. Make all con-

nections in accordance with wiring diagrams and follow allapplicable local and national codes. Provide disconnect andoverload protection as required. Use copper, twisted pair,conductors only.


Transformer(s)The LM Series actuators require a 24 VAC class 2 transformerand draw a maximum of 4 VA. The actuator enclosure cannotbe opened in the field, there are no parts or components to bereplaced or repaired.


CAUTION: It is good practice to power electronic or digital con-trollers from a separate power transformer than that used foractuators or other end devices. The power supply design inour actuators and other end devices use half wave rectification.Some controllers use full wave rectification. When these twodifferent types of power supplies are connected to the samepower transformer and the DC commons are connected togeth-er, a short circuit is created across one of the diodes in the fullwave power supply, damaging the controller. Only use a singlepower transformer to power the controller and actuator if youknow the controller power supply uses half wave rectification.

Multiple actuators, one transformerMultiple actuators may be powered from one transformer pro-vided the following rules are followed:1. The TOTAL current draw of the actuators (VA rating) is less


lowed. This means that all No. 1 wires from all actuators are connected to the common leg on the transformer and all No 2 wires from all actuators are connected to the hotleg.Mixing wire No. 1 & 2 on one leg of the transformer willresult in erratic operation or failure of the actuator and orcontrols.

Multiple actuators, multiple transformersMultiple actuators positioned by the same control signal may bepowered from multiple transformers provided the following rulesare followed:



Wire length for LM Series actuatorsKeep power wire runs below the limits listed in the Fig. 1. Ifmore than one actuator is powered from the same wire run,divide the allowable wire length by the number of actuators todetermine the maximum run to any single actuator.



16 Ga 1225 Ft. 20 Ga 400 Ft

18 Ga 725 Ft. 22 Ga 200 Ft

Fig. 1

Example for LM… US: 3 actuators, 18 Ga wire725 Ft ÷ 3 Actuators = 241.6 Ft. Maximum wire run.

Wire Type and Wire Installation TipsFor most installations, 18 or 16 Ga. cable works well with theLM24 type actuators. Use code approved wire nuts, terminalstrips or solderless connectors where wires are joined. It isgood practice to run control wires unspliced from the actuatorto the controller. If splices are unavoidable, make sure thesplice can be reached for possible maintenance. Tape and/orwire tie the splice to reduce the possibility of the splice beinginadvertently pulled apart.

LM Series Actuators with Terminal StripLM…-T actuators feature an external screw terminal strip on

the top of the actuator housing (instead of cable). Connectionsare numbered and a wiring schematic is shown next to the ter-minal strip. The terminals are designed for 26 to 14 GA wire.

Overload protectionAll Belimo actuators are electronically protected against over-load. In the LM series an electronic circuit maintains the cur-rent at a level which will not damage the motor while providingadequate holding torque.

Manual Override

A button on the actuator cover disengages the gear train so the

damper shaft can be moved manually. Release the button and thegear train is re-engaged.

Use the manual override to test the installation withoutpower. For tight shut-off the damper should close with 5°of actuator stroke left.

0 1

Gear releasebutton



127


©


L M

0 1

Adjust angle-of-rotation in steps of 2.5°

Installation InstructionsFeature Operation

®

Mechanical Angle of Rotation Limiting (LM Series, On-Off/Floating and LM24-SR-T-2.0 US)

The adjustable stops are needed when there is no damper stop

or if you want the damper to halt rotating before it reaches itsstops. The LM actuator can be indefinitely stalled in any posi-

tion without harm.1. Loosen the two end stops with a No. 2 Phillips head screwdriv-

er being careful not to unscrew the captive nut under the slot.

2. Move the stops (in 2.5°steps) to the desired position and re-tighten the screws.

LM actuators have a reversing switch on the cover labeled “CW-

CCW”. Switch position indicates start point. For the LM24-SR(-T)2.0 US, with the switch in position “CW”, the actuator rotates clock-

wise with an increase in voltage or current. With the switch in posi-tion “CCW”, the actuator rotates counterclockwise with an increase

in voltage or current.

The LM24-3-T US does not have a switch. They rotate clock-

wise when power is applied to wire #3, and counterclockwisewhen power is applied to wire #2.

During checkout, the switch position can be temporarily

reversed and the actuator will reverse its direction. This allows the technician a fast and easy way to check the actuator opera-

tion without having to switch wires or change settings on the thermostat. When the check-out is complete, make sure the switch is placed back to its original position.

CW

CCW

0 1

CW

CCW

0 1

10 VDC2 VDC 2 VDC10 VDC

Direction of rotation switch. Position indicates start point.

Electronic Angle of Rotation Limiting (LM24-SR-2.0 US)

With the LM24-SR-2.0 US proportional actuator, you canadjust the angle of rotation (95°) anywhere between 20% and

100% using an external adjustment. A potentiometer limitsrotation while allowing the full control input and feedback range

(2 to 10 VDC), providing higher control resolution within the lim-

ited angle of rotation.CCW

0 1

CW

CW

CCW

2 VDC

10 VDC

45° /50% Limit

Feedback signal will alsobe adjusted 2 to 10 VDC

0 1

2 VDC

10 VDC

45° /50% Limit

0 1

2 0 % 1 0 0%

100%20%

Limitation set at 50%Angle of rotation = 45°

Control signal = 10 VDC

Direction of Rotation Switch (All LM except LM24-3-T US)



128

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Limitation set at 50%Angle of rotation = 45°

100%20%

Limitation set at 100%Angle of rotation = 90

100%20%

COMHOT

2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

max4A (T)

( + ) ( + ) ( – )

~ ~ COM

2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

+

–

max4A (T)

( + ) ( – )

HOT COM

3 2 1

3 2 1

+

–

NSV-BAT (2) or equiv. NSV-BAT (2) or equiv.

Y1

LM24… US

on-off/floating point( + ) ( + ) ( – )

~ ~ COM

( + ) ( – )

HOT COM

3 2 1

3 2 1

Y1

Note: Fail-safe directionmust have normallyclosed contact.

To other actuators To other actuators

LM24-SR (-T) 2.0 US

LM24-SR (-T) 2.0 US

LM24… US

on-off/floating point

24 VAC 24 VAC

COMHOT

®

q

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot


Grn (4) U, 2-10 VDC

(–)

(+)

Control Signal0 to 10 VDCController A

1

1

LM24-SR(-T) 2.0 US

q

q

(–)

(+)

Control Signal0 to 10 VDCController B

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

IN4001, IN4003 diode or equivalent, observe polarity.

Explanation: The diode allows the positive (+) signalto pass through it and does not allow a higher level pos-itive signal to back feed to the other controller. Only thehighest controller signal is seen by the actuator. Thereis a .7 VDC voltage loss across the diode. This makesthe actual voltage range 2.7 to 10.7 VDC.


The LM24-SR(-T) 2.0 US is provided a screw terminalinstead of cable.

The LM24-SR(-T) 2.0 US does not have feedback.

Operating 1 LM24-SR(-T) 2.0 US with the higher oftwo 0 to 10 VDC control signals.

Battery back up for fail-safe operation.Up to 30 actuators can be powered with one NSV24 and 2 batteries.

Parallel control of two LM24-SR-2.0 US actuators withdifferent angles of rotation

q

q

q

q

2

(–)

(+)

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

2 to 10 VDC

Control Signal

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y

Grn (5) U

LM24-SR-2.0 US

L R

Blk (1) Common

Red (2) + Hot

Wht (3) Y

Grn (5) U

LM24-SR-2.0 US

L R

Using the LM24-SR-2.0 USactuator electronic rotationadjustment, both dampers willchange position in proportion toeach other.

E.G. With a 50% position sig-nal from the controller (6 VDC),damper #1 will rotate to 45°,

damper #2 will rotate to 22.5°.

Damper #1

Damper #2

Special Wiring Diagrams



129


©


L M

Procedure





position.











LM24SR(-T) US this is 0 to 10 VDC or

0 to 20 mA.



ator move.

Use the manual override button to







Expected Response







Signal” position.


tion




cate.


to fully open.




Go To Step…


Step 8


ed, actuator begins

to drive

Step 1

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Actuator operates

properly.

Step 8

Controller output

(actuator input) is

correct. Input

Polarity Correct.

Step 6

Damper moves

properly

Step 7

Defective Actuator.

Replace Actuator -

See Note 2


Go To Step…

No response at all

Step 2Operation is

reversed


toward "Control

Signal Position"

Step 4

Power wiring

corrected, actuator


Step 4

Does not drive

toward “Control

Signal Position”

Step 4

Step 5

Reprogram, adjust

repair or replace


Step 1

Find cause of

damper jam and

repair.

Step 1


requirement and


Step

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.






• Controllers and actuators must have separate 24 VAC/VDC power sources.Note 2 If failure occurs within 5 years from original installation date, notify Belimo and give details of the application.

LM24-SR(-T) 2.0 US Electrical check-out procedure

®

Startup and Checkout



130

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Old Product Replacement Page

Spring Return

Airside only

AF24-3 US AFR24-3 US 12

AF24-3-S US AFR24-3-S US 12

AF24-SR-S US AF24-MFT-S US 5

AF24-SR95 US AF24-MFT95 US 5*

AF24-PWM US AF24-MFT US + P-20… 5

FM24 US AFR24 US 8

FM24-SR US AFR24-SR US 14

FM24-SR90 US AF24-MFT95 US 5

FM24-SR95 US AF24-MFT95 US 5

FS24 AF24 US 8

FS24-S AF24-S US 8

LF24-SR-MP US LF24-MFT-20 US 5

LF24-SR-S-MP US LF24-MFT-S-20 US 5

SF120 US AFR120 US 10

SF120-S US AF120-S US 10

SF24 US AFR24 US 8

SF24-S US AF24-S US 8

*(Page 5 of MFT Doc.)

Old Product Replacement Page

Non-Spring Return

AM24-PWM-A US AM24-MFT US + P-20002 5

AM24-PWM-B US AM24-MFT US + P-20003 5

AM24-PWM-C US AM24-MFT US + P-20001 5

AM24-SRS-A US AM24-MFT US + P-10004 5

AM24-SRS-B US AM24-MFT US + P-10005 5

AM24-SRS-C US AM24-MFT US + P-10006 5

KM24 LM24-3 US 116

KM24-3 LM24-3 US 116

KM24-SL LM24-SR-2.0 US 118

KM24-SR LM24-SR-2.0 US 118

LM24-SR US LM24-SR-2.0 US 118

LM24-SR-T US LM24-SR-T-2.0 US 118

NM24-1 US NM24 US 100

NM24 EU NM24 US 116

NM24-1/200 US NM24 US 100

NM24-1/300 US NM24 US 100

NM24-SRS US NM24-MFT US + P-10… 5

NM24-PWM US NM24-MFT US + P-20… 5

NMV24-D US NMV-D2 US, contact Belimo for support

NMV24-V US NMV-D2 US, contact Belimo for support

SM24 US AM24 US 82

SM24-SR US AM24-MFT US 5

SM24-SRS US AM24-MFT US + P-10… 5

When replacing an actuator, whether Belimo or other, be sure to consider the application parameters before selecting the replacement. The newproduct may not be fit for the application. An example would be an SM24-SR US mounted to a valve linkage. The direct replacement of the actu-ator is the AM24-MFT US. However the SM… and AM… are different lengths, the linkage would need to be replaced as well.

When retrofitting or replacing actuators it is always best to select the new product based on application parameters. This ensures the selectedactuator is fit for the application. Never only use a part number cross-reference when replacing defective actuators. You should always ask your-self "Why is this actuator defective?" It may have been misapplied.

®

Phased-out Belimo Actuators

Opposed blade orParallel blade con-trol construction?

Are there Blade andEdge seals on the damper?

This will impactthe properselection as theseals add resist-ance requiringmore torque.

For the damper inquestion, Whatdoes the manufac-turer specify as thetorque rating?

If this information isnot available refer tothe “typical damper requirements” chart.

What is the air velocity, staticpressure or design CFM?

Systems above 2,000 FPMrequire additional torque

FAN

FAN

E

OAR

SA

A= MIXING PLENUM∆PT

∆ P

D

∆PD

∆PD

∆PT

∆ P T

A

B

OA

Consider theapplication. Is theactuator/damperexposed to out-side air? usespring return.

Do you need a step down transformer? If replacingan oil immersed gear train actuator. Is the trans-former in the defective actuator? You may need topurchase one.

What is the con-trol signal to theactuator?• Two posi tion• Floating point• Modulat ing

• Sequencing• “Non-standard”

voltage signals

This will be a criticalcomponent to thedamper selection ofan actuator.consider the …MFTactuator and theflexibility of it’s

application.

Controller

Is therea bearingsupportbracket?Can onebe added?

L” x W” = Total sqinches/144 = totalsq feet

Opposed Blade w/o sealsOpposed Blade w/ seals

Parallel Blade w/o sealsParallel Blade w/ seals

If unknownuse a worstcase scenario,parallel bladewith seals.

1

6

What is thetotal area ofthe damper?

Is fail-saferequired?

2 3 4

5 7

8 9 10

What is the supply volt-age to the actuator?• 24 VAC/DC

• 120 VAC• 230 VAC single phase

Can you directcouple to adamper shaft?

Direct coupling hasbecome the industry

standard. Some retrofit applications do not allowdirect coupling. Refer to the Belimo MountingMethods guide for application details.

Sizing and Selection



132

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


For detailed installation instructions call 800-543-9038 • See the Belimo MOUNTING METHODS GUIDE for application information.

Mechanical Accessories®

Applications

Index CLAMPS/POSITION INDICATOR

IND-AF2 Damper Position Indicator for AF/NF Actuators ................134IND-LF Damper Position Indicator for LF Actuators.........................134

K4-1 Jackshaft Clamp for AF/NF and AM Actuators .............. ...........134K4-H Hex Shaft Clamp for AF/ NF and AM Actuators ............... ........134

LINKAGE ACCESSORIES

KH-AF Crankarm for AF/NF Actuators ................ ................ ...............134KH-AF-1 Crankarm for Jackshaft Applications

for AF/ NF Actuators.........................................................................134KH-AFV V-Bolt Kit for KH-AF (-1) Crankarms ................ ................ ..134KH-LF Crankarm for LF Actuators......................................................135KH-LFV V-Bolt Kit for KH-LF Crankarms... ................ ............... ........135KH6 Universal Crankarm ...................................................................135KH8 Universal Crankarm ...................................................................135KG6 Ball Joint ...................................................................................135KG8 Ball Joint ...................................................................................135KG10 Ball Joint for KH6 ................ ................ ................ ................ .....135SH8 Push Rod for KG6, KG8 Ball Joints, 5/16” diameter ............... ..135SH10 Push Rod for KG10 Ball Joints, 3/8” diameter..........................135

ZG-DC1 Damper Clip for Damper Blade ............... ................ .............136ZG-DC2 Damper Clip for Damper Blade ............... ................ .............136

CRANKARM ADAPTOR KITS

ZG-AF Crankarm Adaptor Kit for AF/ NF Actuators .........................136ZG-AF108 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for AF/ NF Actuators ...................136ZG-LF112 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for LF Actuators .............. .............136ZG-LF2 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for LF Actuators ............... ................136ZG-LFC114 ..........................................................................................137ZG-NM4 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for NM Actuators.............................109ZG-NM3 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for NM Actuators.............................109ZG-AM Crankarm Adaptor Kit for AM Actuators.................................93ZG-GM2 Crankarm Adaptor Kit for GM Actuators ............... ...............76

BRACKETS

ZG-100 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators..140

ZG-101 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators..141

ZG-102 Multiple Actuator Mounting Bracketfor SM, AM, GM, AF Actuators.........................................................142

ZG-103 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, Actuators....143ZG-104 Universal Mounting Bracket for SM, AM, GM, Actuators....144ZG-105 Universal Mounting Bracket for NM Actuators....................145ZG-106 Universal Mounting Bracket for AF/ NF Actuators ..............146ZG-107 Universal Mounting Bracket for AF/ NF Actuators ..............146ZG-108 Universal Mounting Bracket for AF/ NF Actuators ..............147ZG-109 Mounting Bracket for ZS-200/250 Housings ................ ........154ZG-110 Mounting Bracket for ZS-200/250 Housings ................ ........154ZG-112 Mounting Bracket for LF Actuators.........................................62

SHAFT ADAPTORS

AV1 Shaft Extension for damper operating shafts with AM actuators ....137AV10-18 Universal Shaft Extension for damper operating shafts ....137ZG-JSA(-1,2,3) Jackshaft Adaptors for hollow jackshafts ...............139ZG-LMSA Shaft Adaptor for LM Actuators ................ ................ ........137ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft Adaptor for NM Actuators .............. ................ ......137

ROTATION LIMITERS

ZDB Angle of Rotation Limiter for SM Actuators .............................137ZDB-GM Angle of Rotation Limiter for GM Actuators ................ ......137ZDB-AF2 Angle of Rotation Limiter for AF/ NF Actuators ...............138

MISCELLANEOUS

ZG-H2 Actuator Operator Handle for SM, GM, NM Actuators..........138

PROTECTIVE HOUSINGS

ZS-100 Weather Shield-Steel for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators.......149ZS-101 Base for ZS-100......................................................................149ZS-150 Weather Shield-Polycarbonate

for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF Actuators ............... ................ ................ ...150ZS-300(-1) NEMA 4X Housing

for SM, AM, GM, AF, NF and LF Series Actuators .............. ............151ZS-260 Explosion-Proof Housings

for SM, AM, GM, AF and NF Series Actuators.................................153

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

10

0 - 5

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

L RIND-2

ZDB-AF2

Crankarm Adaptor Kits

Rotation Limiting

Front

Back

Bolt Housing

Conduit Holes3/4-14 NPT

Rear ShaftLocation Plug

Anti-Rotation Strap

Pan

ZS-260

Housings



133


©



Mechanical Accessories ®

We’ll help solve any application problem with a widerange of accessories and unparalleled customer service.

A CLOSER LOOK…



Extensive product range. Competitive project pricing. Application assistance.Same-day shipments. Free technical support. Five year warranty.









134

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Special clamps / position indicator

Linkage accessoriesWhen the actuator is not mounted to the damper shaft

®

K4-1 Jackshaft ClampFor AF, NF and AM Series Actuators

Fits jackshafts up to 1.05”. Retaining ringfixes clamp to actuator teeth.

K4-H Hex Shaft clampFor AF, NF and AM Series Actuators

Fits hex shafts 3/8” to 5/8”. Retaining ring

fixes clamp to actuator teeth.

IND-AF2 Damper Position IndicatorFor AF and NF Series Actuators

For damper position indication in short-shaft installations.

IND-LF Damper Position IndicatorFor LF Series Actuators. Similar to IND-AF2

KH-AF CrankarmFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Fits round shafts to 3/4”. Retaining clipfixes clamp to actuator teeth.

KH-AF-1 Crankarm for JackshaftApplicationsFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Fits round shafts to 1.05”. Retaining clipfixes clamp to actuator teeth.

KH-AFV V-Bolt KitFor AF/NF Crankarms

Allows direct coupling with KH-AF, KH-

AF-1. Contains 3/4” V-bolt, 1” V-bolt. 2

Nuts and Washers.

KH-LFV V-Bolt KitFor LF Crankarms

Allows direct coupling with KH-LF.

Contains V-bolt and 2 nuts.

KH-LF CrankarmFor LF Series Actuators

Fits shafts to 1/2”. Retaining clip fixes

clamp to actuator teeth.


K4-1

K4-H

KH-AF / KH-AF-1

KH-AFV

KH-LFV

KH-LF

K4-1

IND-AF2

IND-LF



135


©



Linkage accessories ®

KH6 Universal Crankarm

Zinc plated steel, for damper shafts 3/8”

to 11/16” dia. (10 to 18mm) or 3/8” to9/16” square (10 to 14mm). Slot width 1/4”

(6.2mm). Uses KG6 or KG10 ball joint.

KH8 Universal Crankarm

Zinc plated steel, suitable for damper

shafts 3/8” to 11/16” dia. (10 to 18mm) or

3/8” to 9/16” square (10 to 14mm). Slotwidth 21/64” (8.2mm). Uses KG8 or KG10

ball joint.

KG6 Ball JointFor KH6 Universal Crankarm

Zinc plated steel. For 5/16” dia. rod

(8mm).

KG8 90°Ball JointFor KH8 Universal Crankarms

Zinc plated steel. For 5/16” dia. rod(8mm). 90°angle.

KG10 Ball JointFor KH6 and KH8 Universal Crankarms

Zinc plated steel. For 3/8” dia. rod(10mm).

SH8 Push RodFor KG6 and KG8 Ball Joints

36” length. 5/16” dia.

SH10 Push Rod

For KG10 Ball joints

36” length. 3/8” dia.

KH6/ KH8

KG6

KG10

KG8

SH8

SH10



136

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ZG-LF2

Linkage accessories

Crankarm adaptor kitsWhen the actuator is not mounted to the damper shaft

®

ZG-DC1 Damper ClipMounts to damper blade - 3.5”

ZG-DC2 Damper ClipMounts to damper blade - 6”

The ZG-DC1 and ZG-DC2 damper clips

are designed to mount to damper bladesand work as crankarms in damper linkage

applications. The ZG-DC1 is designed tobe used in applications where the actua-

tor is located in front of the damper. TheZG-DC2 is designed to be used when the

actuator is located above or below the

damper.

ZG-AF Crankarm Adaptor KitFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-AF crankarm with

retaining ring2 stand-off brackets

4 mounting feet2 bolts with nuts

2 self-tapping metal screws

2 KG8 ball jointsInstructions

ZG-AF108 Crankarm Adaptor KitFor AF and NF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-AF crankarm with

retaining ring1 ZG-108 mounting bracket

(see page 10)4 bolts with nuts

Note: May require crankarm and balljoints.

ZG-LF112 Crankarm Adaptor KitFor LF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-LF crankarm with

retaining ring1 ZG-112 mounting bracket

(see page 10)2 bolts with nuts


ZG-LF2 Crankarm Adaptor KitFor LF Series Actuators

Kit contains: 1 KH-LF crankarm with

retaining clip1 mounting bracket

3 bolts with nutsInstructions


ZG-DC1

ZG-DC2

ZG-AF

ZG-AF108

ZG-LF112

ZG-DC2

clip

ZG-DC1 clip

ZG-AF

ZG-106 or

ZG-107 with

KH-AF

ZG-112

KH-LFcrankarm



137


©



Shaft adaptors ®

AV10-18 Universal Shaft ExtensionFor damper operating shafts

Approx. 9 1/2” (240mm) extension for shafts3/8” to 11/16” dia. (10 to 18mm), or 3/8” to

9/16” square (10 to 14mm).

AV1 Shaft Extension for AM SeriesActuators

Approx. 3” (75mm) extension for shafts 3/8”to 3/4” dia. (10 to 20mm), or 3/8” to 9/16”

square (10 to 14mm).

ZG-NMSA-1 Shaft AdaptorFor NM Series Actuators

For 1/2” dia. shafts shorter than 3/4”. 3”long, 13/16” outside dia. 2 set screws. Shaft

extends 1” inside ZG-NMSA-1.

ZG-LMSA Shaft AdaptorFor LM, LF Series Actuators

For 1/2” dia. shafts shorter than 3/4”. 3”long, 5/8” outside dia. 2 set screws. Shaft

extends 3/4” inside ZG-LMSA.

ZDB Angle of Rotation LimiterFor SM Series Actuators

Remove nuts on V-bolt and install ZDB to

clamp assembly with indicator in 0 position.Remove clip holding clamp assembly toactuator. Pull out clamp assembly and

rotate to the number of graduations you

would like to limit rotation by. Each gradua-tion is 9°. Reinstall clamp assembly.

ZDB-GM Angle of Rotation LimiterFor GM Series Actuators

Disengage gears with manual release and

turn clamp indicator to 0 position. Pull out

retaining clip and remove clamp. LocateZDB-GM at desired graduation (each

approx. 10°). Reinstall clamp.

ZG-LFC114

AV10-18AV1

ZG-NMSA-1

ZG-LMSA

ZDB

ZDB-GM

Rotation limiters

m i n . 3 / 4"

AV1

ZG-LFC114

ZG-LFC114 Mounting KitSpecifically for Trane Voyager unit retrofit

Kit contains: 1-Mounting bracket1-Shaft adaptor

2-Actuator mounting bolts

and nuts4-Mounting bracket screws



138

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Rotation limiters®

9 0

8 0

7 0 6 0

5 0 4 0

3 0

2 0

10

0 - 5

9 0 8

0 7 0

6 0

5 0 4 0

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

L R

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

2 0

10

0 - 5

9 0

8 0

7 0

6 0

5 0

4 0

3 0

20

1 0

0

- 5

L RIND-2

ZDB-AF2

K4 (-1)

ZDB-AF2ZDB-AF2 Angle of Rotation LimiterFor AF and NF Series Actuators

The ZDB-AF2 is used in conjunction withthe tab on the universal clamp or IND-AF2

position indicator which comes with theZDB-AF2. In order to function properly, the

clamp or indicator must be mounted correct-

ly. The ZDB-AF2 may not work in certainmounting orientations using the ZG-106 or

ZG-107 mounting brackets. It will not workwith the ZG-108 mounting bracket. Limiting

the damper rotation must be accomplished

by adjusting the crankarm linkage.

1. Determine damper rotation required.

2. Locate the ZDB-AF2 on the actuatorso that its edge lines up with the

degree graduation on the actuator

face which corresponds with therequired rotation.

3. Make sure the locating “teeth” on the

ZDB-AF2 are engaged into the locat-ing holes on the actuator.

4. Pierce the actuator label at the cross

hair showing through the slot on the

ZDB-AF2. Fasten to the actuatorusing the self tapping screw provided.

ZG-H2 Actuator Operator HandleFor SM, AM (with 3/4” clamp), GM and

NM Series Actuators

Rotation Limiting with ZDB-AF2 in standard shaftmounting.

Rotation Limiting with ZDB-AF2 in short shaft mount-ing requires IND-AF2 Position Indicator. Actuator’sstandard clamp faces damper.

ZDB-AF2

ZG-H2

Miscellaneous



139


©



ApplicationThe ZG-JSA jack shaft adaptors are

designed to be inserted into hollow jackshafts which have an outside diameter

greater than 3/4 inch and provide a 3/4inch shaft for mounting Belimo actuators.

Installation1. Check the inside edge of the jack shaft

for burrs. Use a file if necessary toremove any burr which would prevent

the ZG-JSA from being inserted into the

jack shaft.2. The inside surface of the jack shaft

should be clean. If necessary, cleanthe jack shaft to remove any oil, grease,

or dirt.3. Loosen the tension nut on the ZG-JSA

enough to allow the diameter of the

holding wedge to be in line with the twoother sections of the adaptor.

4. Insert the ZG-JSA into the jack shaft.Care must be taken to make sure that

the wedge section of the adaptor is aminimum of 1 1/2 inches from any jack

shaft holding bushing. If the holding

wedge section is too close to a bushing,the adaptor may lock the jack shaft to

the bushing or the bushing may bedamaged.

5. Tighten the tension nut on the ZG-JSA

to expand the holding wedge section,fixing the adaptor to the jack shaft.

6. Mount the specified actuator to the 3/4inch section of the adaptor.

Jack shaft adaptors ZG-JSA- .To adapt hollow jack shafts to fit Belimo actuators

Technical Data ZG-JSA-1 ZG-JSA-2 ZG-JSA-3

Jack shaft size

Outside dia. 1.00 " 1 5/16" 1.05"

Inside dia. 3/4 " 1 3/32" 27/32"

Weight 1.3 lbs. 2.3 lbs. 1.6 lbs.

Material Cold rolled steel, nickel plated

Dimensions

ZG-JSA-.

A B C D

ZG-JSA-1 3/4 3/4 – 10 3/4

ZG-JSA-2 1 1/16 3/4 6 12 1/2

ZG-JSA-3 13/16 3/4 6 12 1/4

Adia. B

dia.

D

Approximate

Holding wedgeTension nut

C

®



ZG-100 Universal Mounting BracketFor SM, AM, GM, NF, and AF series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-100 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to the

damper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting, fastenedto the ductwork or directly to the damper assembly. It mayalso be used to mount to other surfaces rather than the duct.

The ZG-100 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for theSM, GM, NF and AF series actuators and their associatedcrankarm adaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allowsmounting these actuators in three, different, mounting orienta-tions. The ZG-100 may also be field drilled for special ormore exact mounting of linkage components.

Installation1. Mount the appropriate set of crankarm adaptor kit brackets

and crankarm to the actuator to be used. When using spring

return actuators, care must be taken to select the propermounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.

ACTUATOR CRANKARMSERIES KIT FOR ZG-100

SM ZG-SM2AM ZG-AMGM ZG-GM2NF ZG-AFAF ZG-AF

Note: Follow the instructions for mounting the adaptor kitsto the actuator or the actuator may be damaged.

2. Position the ZG-100 mounting bracket in the planned mount-

ing location. If possible, do not fasten at this time. TheZG-100 can be mounted by using either the four 1/4 inchdiameter holes on its base or five 1/4 x 5/8 inch oval holeson its edge. Additional holes may be drilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desired mount-ing location against the ZG-100 and see if one of the existinghole patterns can be used for the actuator mounting. If theexisting hole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct holepositions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.

4. With the actuator mounting position established, positionthe ZG-100 bracket in the best position for propercrankarm/linkage alignment. Fasten the ZG-100 to themounting surface.

5. Mount the actuator/adaptor assembly to the ZG-100.

6. Install the crankarm linkage between the actuator and damper.

7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, GM, and AF actuatorseries may be manually operated without power available.

OTHER UNIVERSAL MOUNTING BRACKETS

MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-101 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, AM, GMZG-104 SM, AM, GMZG-105 NMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AFZG-108 NF, AF

140

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


®



141


©



ZG-101 Universal Mounting BracketFor SM, AM, GM, NF, and AF series actuators

®


damper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. Thebracket is designed to mount to the damper base, providinggreater strength than mounting to the sheet metal or fiber-board duct only. It may also be used as a standard right anglemounting bracket where more contact area is desired. Thelarger contact area spreads the torsional load created by theactuator/damper operation over a wider area.

The ZG-101 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for theSM, GM, NF and AF series actuators and their associatedcrankarm adaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allowsmounting these actuators in two, different, mounting orienta-tions.

Installation

1. Mount the appropriate set of crankarm adaptor kit bracketsand crankarm to the actuator to be used. When using springreturn actuators, care must be taken to select the propermounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.


SM ZG-SM2AM ZG-AMGM ZG-GM2NF ZG-AFAF ZG-AF


2. Position the ZG-101 mounting bracket in the plannedmounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-101 can be mounted by using at least three of thenine 1/4 x 5/8 inch oval holes. Additional holes may bedrilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desired mount-ing location against the ZG-101 and see if one of the existinghole patterns can be used for the actuator mounting. If theexisting hole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct holepositions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.




7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, GM, and AF actuatorseries may be manually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, AM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, AM, GMZG-104 SM, AM, GMZG-105 NM

ZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AFZG-108 NF, AF



142

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ZG-102 Multiple Actuator Mounting BracketFor GM and AF series actuators

®

ApplicationThe multiple actuator mounting bracket is designed for caseswhere it is necessary to mount two actuators to one shaft to

provide extra torque.The dual mounting bracket is typically used with the AF and

GM series actuators. This is due to the fact that each ofthese series are the highest torque range available.

Installation1. Determine if the second actuator will mount on top of

(Figure A) or 180°opposed to (Figure B) the first actuator.2. Mount the first actuator as you would normally; but, do

not wire at this time. Make sure the shaft clamp assem-

bly on the actuator is positioned correctly for properdamper operation.

3. Mount the actuator rear mounting bracket to the top ofthe multiple actuator mounting bracket. There are two

locations for the mounting of this bracket. Hole set A isthe preferred location. Hole set B is to be used if addi-

tional clearances are required to route flexible conduit to

the actuators.4. Loosen the three locking screws located in the slots of

the mounting bracket.5. Adjust the top section of the bracket to a height which

clears the top of the first actuator by approximately 1/8".

Tighten the three locking screws.6. Mount the second actuator on the shaft and slide the

mounting bracket under the second actuator so the rearmounting bracket stud engages the slot at the rear of the

actuator.7. Transfer the thru hole locations from the multiple actuator

mounting bracket base to the mounting surface.8. Drill the three holes. (Use a No. 2 drill if you are using the

No. 8 sheet metal screws provided.)

9. Fasten the multiple mounting bracket.10. After verifying the correct orientation of the shaft clamp

assembly of the second actuator, tighten the fastening

nuts on the clamp.11. Wire the actuators in parallel to the controller.

12. Power the actuators and check for proper operation.

AccessoryAV10 - 18 Universal shaft extension

Hole set B Hole set A

7"

3 3/8"

5 3/4"

1 15/16"

Material: 12 GAGalvanized

Weight: 1.8 lbs.

Note: The majoradvantage with this

method is it requires

less mounting area.The manual override,

if available, cannot

be used in thisconfiguration.

Note: The major advantages

are that a shorter shaft isrequired and a lower profile

is achieved.

Figure A Figure B



143


©



ZG-103 Universal Mounting BracketFor SM and GM series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-103 universal mounting bracket is designed for appli-

cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to the

damper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. The

ZG-103 is designed to mount the SM and GM series actua-

tors in the same mounting locations as common foot mount-

ed, crankarm style actuators.

The ZG-103 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for the

SM, and GM series actuators and their associated crank-arm

adaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allows mounting

these actuators in two, different, mounting orientations.


and crankarm to the actuator to be used. When using

spring return actuators, care must be taken to select theproper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.


SM ZG-SM2

AM ZG-AM

GM ZG-GM2


2. Position the ZG-103 mounting bracket in the plannedmounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-103 can be mounted by using at least two of thesix 1/4 inch diameter holes in it base. Additional holesmay be drilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desiredmounting location against the ZG-103 and locate the exist-ing hole pattern for the actuator mounting. If the existinghole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct hole posi-tions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.

4. With the actuator mounting position established, positionthe ZG-103 bracket in the best position for propercrankarm/linkage alignment. Fasten the the ZG-103 to themounting surface.



7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, and GM actuator seriesmay be manually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, AM, GM, NF, AF

ZG-101 SM, AM, GM, NF, AF

ZG-104 SM, AM, GM

ZG-105 NM

ZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AF

ZG-108 NF, AF

13"

2 3/4"

7"


Weight: 2.9 lbs.

®



144

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ZG-104 Universal Mounting BracketFor SM, AM and GM series actuators


cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to the

damper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. Itmay be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. The

ZG-104 is designed to mount the SM, and GM series actua-

tors in the same mounting locations as common foot mount-

ed, crankarm style actuators.

The ZG-104 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for the

SM and GM series actuators and their associated crankarm

adaptor brackets. The hole pattern layout allows mounting

these actuators in 2, different, mounting orientations.


and crankarm to the actuator to be used. When using

spring return actuators, care must be taken to select theproper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.


SM ZG-SM2

AM ZG-AM

GM ZG-GM2


2. Position the ZG-104 mounting bracket in the plannedmounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-104 can be mounted by using at least three of thenine 1/4 inch diameter holes in it base. Additional holesmay be drilled if necessary.

3. Position the actuator/adaptor assembly in the desiredmounting location against the ZG-104 and locate the exist-ing hole pattern for the actuator mounting. If the existinghole patterns cannot be used, mark the correct hole posi-tions and drill the desired holes. Do not mount.




7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The SM, and GM actuator seriesmay be manually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, AM, GM, NF, AF

ZG-101 SM, AM, GM, NF, AF

ZG-103 SM, AM, GM

ZG-105 NM

ZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AF

ZG-108 NF, AF

13"

6 1/8"

4"

Material: 12 GA

Galvanized

Weight: 3.0 lbs.

®



145


©



ZG-105 Universal Mounting BracketFor NM series actuators

4"

2"

8"


Weight: 0.7 lbs.


cations where the actuator cannot be mounted directly to thedamper shaft, and no proper mounting surface is available. It

may be used for outside or inside the duct mounting. The ZG-

105 is designed to mount the NM series actuators in the samemounting locations as common foot mounted, crankarm style

actuators.

The ZG-105 is provided with prepunched hole patterns for use

with the NM series actuators with the ZG-NM3 crankarmadaptor kit. The hole pattern layout allows mounting these

actuators in two, different, mounting orientations.

Installation1. Position the ZG-105 mounting bracket in the planned

mounting location. If possible, do not fasten at this time.The ZG-105 can be mounted by using the three 9/64 inchdiameter holes in its base. Additional holes may be drilledif necessary.

2. Using a number 10 tamper-proof torx screwdriver, removethe four torx head screws on the base of the actuator.

3. Position the actuator in the desired mounting locationagainst the ZG-105 and locate the existing hole pattern forthe actuator mounting.

4. Align the screw holes in the base of the actuator to theselected hole set in the ZG-105 and fasten the actuator tothe bracket using the four screws removed in step 2.

5. Mount the NM crankarm into the universal mounting clampat the desired starting angle. Fasten the ZG-105 to themounting surface.

6. Install the crankarm linkage between the actuator anddamper.

7. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The NM actuator series may bemanually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, GM, NF, AF

ZG-101 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, GM

ZG-104 SM, GMZG-106 NF, AF

ZG-107 NF, AF

ZG-108 NF, AF

AccessoryTOOL-03 #10, Tamper-proof TORX screwdriver

®



146

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ZG-106/ZG-107 Universal Mounting BracketFor AF and NF series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-106 and ZG-107 universal mounting brackets aredesigned for applications where the actuator cannot be

mounted directly to the damper shaft. They may be used foroutside or inside the duct mounting. The ZG-106 and ZG-107are designed to mount the NF and AF series actuators in thesame mounting locations as common foot mounted, crankarmstyle actuators. Hole patterns in the base match commonHoneywell™ and Johnson Controls™ actuators for easy retro-fit. The ZG-106 and ZG-107 are designed with different actua-tor mounting heights. The ZG-106 is designed to place the KH-AFcrankarm in the same relative position as the Honeywell™Mod IV actuators. The ZG-107 will place the crankarm in thesame relative position as the Honeywell™ Mod III actuators.

The ZG-106 and ZG-107 are provided with hole patterns tomount the NF and AF series actuators in either a horizontal or

vertical position to meet space requirements. The KH-AFcrankarm is required to fully convert the NF or AF forcrankarm operation.

Installation1. When using spring return actuators, care must be taken to

select the proper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.

2. If this is a new installation, position the ZG-106 or ZG-107mounting bracket in the planned mounting location. Do notfasten at this time.

If this a retrofit installation replacing common Honeywell™or Johnson Control™ actuators, and the bolt pattern of thebracket matches the pattern of the previous actuator, fas-ten the bracket to the mounting surface. Mount the KH-AFcrankarm to the actuator. Proceed to step 6.

3. Position the actuator in the desired mounting position (hori-zontal or vertical) in the ZG-106 or ZG-107. Slide in themounting bolts to temporarily hold the actuator to the bracket.

4. Mount the KH-AF crankarm to the actuator in the requiredoperating position.

5. Position the bracket/actuator assembly in the best positionfor proper crankarm/linkage alignment. Mark the bracketposition. Remove the actuator. Fasten the bracket to themounting surface.

6. Mount the actuator to the bracket using the 2 mountingbolts and lock nuts.

7. Install the linkage assembly between the damper and actuator.

8. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The AF actuator series may be man-ually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-101 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, GM

ZG-104 SM, GMZG-105 NMZG-108 NF, AF

5 1/2"

A

2 1/4"

B

MODEL NO. A B

ZG-106 1.50" 1.02"

ZG-107 2.25" 1.77"MODEL NO. A B

ZG-106 1.50" 1.02"ZG-107 2.25" 1.77"


Weight: ZG-106 0.7 lbs.ZG-107 0.9 lbs.

®



147


©



ZG-108 Universal Mounting BracketFor AF and NF series actuators


damper shaft. It may be used for outside or inside the ductmounting. The ZG-108 is designed to mount the NF and AFseries actuators in the same mounting locations as commonfoot mounted, crankarm style actuators. Hole patterns in thebase match common Honeywell™, Siebe™ (Barber Colman™)and Johnson Controls™ actuators for easy retrofit.

The ZG-108 is provided with hole patterns to mount the NFand AF series actuators in either a horizontal or vertical posi-tion to meet space requirements. The KH-AF crankarm isrequired to fully convert the NF or AF for crankarm operation.

Installation1. When using spring return actuators, care must be taken to

select the proper mounting orientation for the correct fail-safe operation.

2. If this is a new installation, position the ZG-108 mountingbracket in the planned mounting location. Do not fasten atthis time.

If this is a retrofit installation replacing common Honeywell™,Siebe™ (Barber Colman™) or Johnson Control™ actuators,and the bolt pattern of the bracket matches the pattern ofthe previous actuator, fasten the bracket to the mountingsurface. Mount the KH-AF crankarm to the actuator.Proceed to step 6.

3. Position the actuator in the desired mounting position (hori-zontal or vertical) on the ZG-108. Slide in two of themounting bolts and loosely tighten the lock nuts to tem-porarily hold the actuator to the bracket.

Note: The ZG-108 has hole patterns for three mountingheights for the crankarm location, choose the best heightfor the application.

4. Mount the KH-AF crankarm to the actuator in the requiredoperating position.

5. Position the bracket/actuator assembly in the best positionfor proper crankarm/linkage alignment. Mark the bracketposition. Remove the actuator. Fasten the bracket to themounting surface.

6. Mount the actuator to the bracket using the four mountingbolts and lock nuts at the same height location as deter-

mined in step 3. Or, if a retrofit application, select the cor-rect hole set so the crankarm location matches thecrankarm of the actuator being replaced.

7. Install the linkage assembly between the damper and actuator.

8. Cycle the actuator through its operational range to verifycorrect linkage setup. The AF actuator series may bemanually operated without power available.


MODEL ACTUATOR USED WITHZG-100 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-101 SM, GM, NF, AFZG-103 SM, GM

ZG-104 SM, GMZG-105 NMZG-106 NF, AFZG-107 NF, AF

5 7/8"

2"

5 1/2"


Weight: 1.0 lbs.

®



148

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ZG-108 Universal Mounting BracketMounting Positions for Typical Replacements

Barber Colman™ MA Type - Vertical Barber Colman™ MA Type - Horizontal (left) Barber Colman™ MA Type - Horizontal (right)

Honeywell™ Mod. IV Type- Vertical Honeywell™ Mod. IV Type - Horizontal (left) Honeywell™ Mod. IV Type - Horizontal (right)

Johnson Control™ 100 Series Typeand Honeywell™ Mod. III Type

Vertical


Horizontal (left)


Horizontal (right)

Black holes represent correct bolt locations.

®



149


©



®

ZS-100 Weather ShieldFor all damper actuators

Material: 16 GA Galvanized

Weight: 3.5 lbs.

Note: The ZS-100 is supplied

disassembled

3/16" dia.10 holes

ApplicationThe ZS-100 weather shield provides mod-

erate protection to actuators which are

mounted outdoors. This product is notdesigned as a water tight enclosure. The

weather shield will work with all damperactuators.

InstallationThe ZS-100 weather shield is supplied

disassembled. Supplying it in this manormakes it applicable to a wider range of

field applications.It may be assembled with 2 sides, 2 ends

and the cover to completely conceal the

actuator. A hole punch can be used toprovide a hole to mount a wire conduit. A

foam gasket is also provided to achieve abetter seal between the cover and sides

or from the base to the mounting surface.

If desired, a side or end can be deletedfrom the assembly to provide easy access

from the bottom of the enclosure.

General Instructions:1. The actuator mounting strap must be

shortened by 1 1/8 inches on bothends. (At the closest oblong slot tothe end).

2. Install the actuator following theinstructions for the actuator used.

3. Determine which side of the enclosure

requires holes for wiring. To easeinstallation, holes should be made in

the housing prior to assembly.4. Assemble the ends and sides together

first, then attach the cover.5. If using the gasket, peel off the

backing from the gasket and lay it

onto the surface without stretching it.

If stretched, it may pull loose with age.6. Thread the wiring temporarily through

the wiring hole(s).

7. Center the housing over the actuatorand mount the housing to the

mounting surface with self-drilling

screws.8. Remove the cover from the housing

and install conduit/fittings to thehousing.

9. Check the operation of the actuator

prior to re-installing the cover.10. Re-install the cover.

AccessoriesZS-101 Base mounting plate

14 3/8"

6"

13" 8"

9 1/2"



150

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


®

ZS-150 Weather ShieldFor all damper actuators

ApplicationThe ZS-150 weather shield provides moder-

ate protection to actuators which are mount-ed outdoors. This product is not designed

as a water tight enclosure. The one piece,smoke tinted, polycarbonate housing allows

easy mounting over all damper actuators.The tinted, clear housing allows easy view-ing of the actuator in operation.

InstallationThe ZS-150 weather shield is supplied as aone piece enclosure. Two 7/8 inch wiring

holes are pre-drilled to allow easy connec-

tions of conduit to the housing. If connec-tions must be made to a different spot on

the enclosure or only one hole is required,two plastic plugs are provided to seal the

holes. A foam gasket is also provided to

achieve a better seal between the base of

the enclosure to the mounting surface.

General Instructions:

1. The actuator anti-rotation strap must beshortened by 2 inches on both ends.

2. Install the actuator following the

instructions for the actuator used.3. If using the gasket, peel off the backing

and lay it onto the housings flange sur-face without stretching it. If stretched, it

may pull away with age.

4. Attach the conduit fitting(s), if used, tothe housing and thread the cable(s)

through the fitting(s).

5. Center the housing over the actuatorand fasten the housing to the mountingsurface with self-drilling screws.

12 3/4" [324]

8 3/8"[213]

4"[102]

5 1/4"[146]

7/8" dia.[22.2]

2 holes

3/16" dia. [4.8] 6 holes

16" [406]

Material: Polycarbonate

Color: Clear, smoketinted

Weight: .8 lbs [.4 kg]



151


©



ZS-260 Protective housingFor GM…, AM…, SM…, AF…, NF…, LF… actuators

®


Application

The ZS-260 explosion-proof housing may be used with theGM…, AM…, SM…, AF…, NF…, LF… series actuators. Thishousing is not designed for direct coupling. It is for use in

Class I, II and III hazardous locations, and to meet the require-ments for NEMA 4, 7 & 9 type enclosures.

OperationThe ZS-260 enclosure is designed so that the required actua-

tor may be easily field mounted into the enclosure. The actua-tor is fastened on to the internal portion of the operating shaft

and secured at the end with an anti-rotation strap. A crank-arm, such as the KH8, is mounted to the external portion of

the operating shaft for connection to connection to the damper

linkage. ZG-109 right angle, and ZG-110 standoff mounting

brackets may be used (see back).

The ZS-260 is designed so that the operating shaft can be

mounted on either the front or rear side of the housing.

AccessoriesKH8 Universal crankarmKG8 Universal ball joint

KG10 Universal ball jointZG-109 Right angle mounting bracket

ZG-110 Stand-off mounting bracket

Technical Data ZS-260

Material Housing: cast, copper-free, aluminum,

Cover bolts: stainless steel

Operating shaft: stainless steel

Conduit holes 3/4”–14 NPT (2 supplied)

see Note 1

Operating shaft diameter 1/2 inch

Operating shaft location Front or rear side of housing(Field selected)

Approved applications UL & CSA, Class I, II & III;Group B, C, D, E, F & G

NEMA 7, Class I, Groups B, C & DNEMA 9, Class II, Groups E, F & G

NEMA 4

Weight 31.0 lb. (14.0 kg) without actuator

Note 1: Fittings that meet the requirements of the hazardous

location must be used. All applications must comply with

applicable local and/or national electric code.

Note: Since conditions of use of this product are outside thecontrol of Belimo, the purchaser should determine suitability of

the product for their intended use, and assumes all risk andliability in connection therewith.

8 1/4

3 3/16

16.00

9.500

10.000

8

6.435 (REF)

2 3/8 (REF)

0.690 (REF)

0.690 (REF)



152

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ZS-260 Protective housing®

Drive Shaft

Front

Back

Bolt Housing

Conduit Holes3/4-14 NPT

Rear ShaftLocation Plug

Anti-Rotation Strap

Pan

10

7

8

4

6

5

2

3

9

–AM

–LF

–SM

–GM

–AF /NF

–FM

ZS-260 Mounting Instructions

1. Determine proper operating shaft location.

2. Remove threaded plug from the hole in which theoperating shaft will be mounted.

3. Install the anti-rotation strap, mounting plate, to the

side of the housing where the operating shaft will bemounted.

4. From the inside surface of the housing, insert the oper-

ating shaft, short length first, into the mounting hole.

5. Hand tighten the shaft bushing into the housing until

the star nut/seal is in contact with the face of thehousing.

6. Using a screw driver blade, drive the star nut/seal

clockwise until the bushing is locked into place.7. Install the anti-rotation strap into the mounting plate

at the designated holes for the actuator to be used.

8. Install actuator

9. Wire actuator (per electrical code).

10. Bolt housing together

KH8 Crankarmwith Ball Joint (KG8 or KG10)(order separately)

P u s h Ro d ( S H 8 o r S H1 0 )

(o r de r se pa ra te l y )

ZG-109

ZS-260 Housing

Mounting Hardware(included with ZG-109)

Duct

–AM

–LF

–SM

–GM

–AF/NF

–FM

ZS-260 Shaft Thru Front

Typical Mounting Sequence

Nut

Washer Casting

WasherBolt

LockWasher

KH8 Crankarmwith Ball Joint (KG8 or KG10)(order separately)

P u s h Ro d ( S H 8 o

r S H1 0 )

(o r de r se pa ra te l y )

ZG-110

ZS-260 Housing(shaft through rear)

Mounting Hardware(included with ZG-110)

Typical ZG-110 MountingTypical ZG-109 Mounting



153


©



Technical Data ZS-300 (-1) (-5)

Material All 304 stainless steel housing, door, (with neoprene gasket),

shaft, coupling, universal mounting plate, and hardware.

Conduit holes Field drilled as required. U.L. listed electrical fittings forNEMA 4X conditions must be used.

Operating shaft 1/2” by 5 15/16” long 304 stainless steel with integral cou-

pling for direct mounting to 1/2” round or hexagonal driveshafts. Square head set screws are 304 stainless steel.

Optional shafts ZS-300-C1 1/2” shaft adaptor (standard with housing)

ZS-300-C2 3/4” shaft adaptor

ZS-300-C3 1” shaft adaptor

Rotating shaft seal Machined PVC hub, bronze oil ite bearings, 10 PSI,Nitrile, bi-rotational, hydrodynamic, radial lip Wave seal.

Industry standards The Belimo ZS-300 NEMA 4X enclosure and Belimo model

SM, GM, AM, AF, NF and LF are U.L. listed as an assem-bly. These enclosures conform to the NEMA standard for

Type 4X (water-, dust-tight and corrosion resistant).

Weight 11 lbs. [5 kg] without actuator or mounting brackets.

2 holes 5/16" dia. typ.

5"

3"2"

8 3/4"

17 1/4" 3 3/8" max.

4 1/8"

Drive Shaft/ Coupler

15 7/8"

4 7/16"

5 1/2"

4"

1 1/2"

2 1/2" Adjustment

Optional AdjustableMounting BracketTop and Bottom

FRONT VIEW

SIDE VIEW

PLAN VIEW

Bearing and Shaft Seal

7 1/4"

ZS-300 ZS-300 NEMA 4X HousingFor AM, SM, GM, AF, NF, LF Series Actuators

ApplicationThe ZS-300 (-1) NEMA 4X enclosures

may be used with SM, GM, AM, AF, NFand LF Belimo actuators. They are

intended for use primarily to provide pro-

tection against corrosion, windblown dustand rain, splashing water, hose-directed

water; undamaged by the formation of iceon the enclosure. Type 304 stainless

steel enclosures resist moisture, dust, salt,

and corrosive chemicals, and are easy tokeep clean for sanitary applications.

Operation

The ZS-300 enclosures are designed sothat the required actuator may be easily

mounted in the enclosure. The operating

shaft and coupling are inserted from thebackside through the rotating shaft seal.

The actuator is fastened on the end of theoperating shaft and secured at the end

with an anti-rotation strap. Adjustable

mounting brackets, if supplied, areassembled to the fixed mounting holes at

the top and bottom of the enclosure withstainless steel nuts, bolts and lock wash-

ers. The direct drive coupling is designedfor a 1/2” round or hexagonal shaft and

secured with two square head set screws.Mounting brackets are adjusted andsecured in place.

Ordering InformationZS-300 Housing with mounting brackets

ZS-300-1 Housing without mountingbrackets

ZS-300-5 316L enclosures, custommounting brackets and

operating shaft/couplings areavailable. Consult Belimo.

AccessoriesZS-300-BK Mounting bracket set

ZS-300-C1 1/2” shaft adaptor(standard with housing)

ZS-300-C2 3/4” shaft adaptor

ZS-300-C3 1” shaft adaptor

ZS-300 Protective housing ®

(Ordered separately)



154

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ZS-300 Mounting instructions

1. The damper operating shaft should extend approximately 1 1/2 inches from the damper assembly or duct side. Mount the

drive shaft/coupler ➀ to the damper operating shaft ➁. Fasten the coupler to the damper operating shaft by tightening thetwo 3/8 inch square head set screws ➂.

2. Determine the housing mounting orientation for the application.

3. Locate the housing hole position(s) for the control wiring of the actuator.

4. Make the necessary holes in the housing for the electrical fittings. All fittings must be rated for use in NEMA 4X applications.

5. Install (if ordered with) the 2 mounting brackets ➃ to the housing using the four 1/4-20 screws, washers, and nuts ➄. Do nottighten.

6. Carefully slide the housing over the drive shaft.

7. Place the housing in the desired mounting position. Transfer the mounting hole locations from the mounting bracket to themounting surface.

8. Drill the 4 holes and fasten the brackets to the surface.

9. Install the anti-rotation strap to the housing in the correct location for the actuator which is being used.

10. Mount the actuator to the drive shaft using the instructions for the actuator being used. Finger tighten the nuts of the universal

clamp. Make sure the back of the actuator is parallel to the back of the housing.

11. The operating shaft must pass through the mounting clamp at least 3/8 of an inch. It must not extend beyond the front of thehousing. Slide the actuator/housing assembly in the mounting brackets to obtain the proper position.

12. Tighten the mounting brackets to the housing. Verify that the back of the actuator is still parallel to the back of the housing.

Tighten the nuts on the universal clamp.

13. Make all of the required electrical connections.

14. Test the actuator/damper operation.

15. Fasten the housing cover ➅ using the 6 swivel clamps.

ZS-300 (-1-5)NEMA 4X, stainless steel, corrosion resistant enclosures for SM…, GM…, AF…, and NF… actuators

®

SM

LF

GM

AF/NF

FM/SF

Anti-Rotation Strap Mounting Locations

1

2

3

4

56

Inner plate,see detail below.

Swivel clamps (6)



156

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


S 1 , S 2 A u x i l i a r y

S w i t c h

S N 1 , S N 2 A u x i l i a r y S w i t c h

S A 1 U S , S A 2 U S

A u x i l i a r y S w i t c h

P … F e e d b a c k P

o t e n t i o m e t e r

P A …

U S F e e d b a c k P o t e n t i o m e t e r

S G A 2 4 , S G F 2 4 P o s i t i o n e r s

P T A - 2 5 0 P u l s e W i d t h M o d u l a t i o n I n t e r f a c e

I R M - 1 0 0 I n p u t R

e s c a l i n g M o d u l e

A D S - 1 0 0 A n a l o g t o D i g i t a l S w i t c h

N S V 2 4 B a t t e r y B a c k - u p M o d u l e

Z G - R 0 1 R e s i s t o

r F o r

4 t o 2 0 m A C o n v e r s i o n

Z G - R 0 2 5 0 %

V o

l t a g e D i v i d e r

Z G - R 0 3 , Z G - R 0 5

, Z G - R 0 6 R e s i s t o r K i t s

( F o r m u l t i p l e a c t u a t o r s w i t h H o n e y w e l l S e r i e s 9 0 c o n t r o l l e r s . )

Z G - X 4 0 T r a n s f o

r m e r

Z G - H T R T h e r m o

s t a t / H e a t e r K i t

LM24 (-S) US

LM24-SR US

LM24-MFT US

NM24 US

NM24-SR US

NM24-MFT US

AM24 (-S) US

AM24-SR US

AM24-MFT US

GM24 US

GM24-SR US

GM-24-MFT US

LF24 (-S) US

LF24-SR (-S) US

LF24-3 (-S) US

LF24-MFT US

NF24 (-S) US

NF24-SR US

NF120 (-S) US

NF24-MFT US

AF24 (-S) US

AF24-SR (-S) US

AF24-MFT US

AF24-MFT95 US

AF120 (-S) US

AF230 (-S) USSM24-SR94 US

• •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • •

• • •

• • • • • • • • •• • • • • • •• • • •• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • •

• • • •• • • • • • • • • •• • • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • •• •• • • • • • • •

•• • • • • • •

• •• • • • • • • •• • • • • • •

• • •••• • • •

158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 168 168 170 171

BELIMO ACTUATOR

B E L I M O

E L E C T R O N I C A C C E S S O R Y

w

See Page No. w

Electronic accessory usage chart®



157


©



Electronic Accessories ®

We’ll help solve any application problem with a widerange of accessories and unparalleled customer service.

A CLOSER LOOK…













158

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


S1, S2 Auxiliary switchesFor the direct coupled actuator SM2…/ GM2…

®

Application:The S1 and S2 auxiliary switches are used to indicate when adesired position of a damper is reached or to interface addi-

tional controls for a specific control sequence.

OperationThe S1 and S2 auxiliary switches are mounted onto the directcoupled actuator. A spindle transmits the rotary motion of the

actuator positively to the switching segments. Any switchingpoint on the micro-switches over the full scale of 0 to 10 can

be selected by means of the slotted disc, which can be locked

by the fixing screw in the hub of the disc. The position of theswitch can be read at any time.

If required, the S1 and S2 can also be mounted on a P…feedback potentiometer, but 2 auxiliary switch units cannot be

mounted on top of each other.

AssemblyUse the 4 long bolts, where a S1, S2 auxiliary switch ismounted on top of a P… potentiometer.

Switch setting1, Turn actuator by hand to the 0 setting.

2. Loosen fixing screw in the center of the slotted disc.3. Select the desired switching point on the scale marked 0 to

10 by rotating the slotted disc.4. Re-lock the fixing screws.

5. Check the switching points by turning the actuator by hand.

The slotted disc follows rotation. The micro-switches oper-ate when the arrow passed the positions 0 or 10 (white

line). The switching symbols indicate the actual switching

positions.

Note: with the S1, S2 auxiliary switches, the reversible indi-

cator cannot be used. Use the 4 long bolts when the S1, S2

auxiliary switches are used with the SM24-SR US orGM24-SR US.

Technical Data S1 S2

Number of switches 1 SPDT 2 SPDT

Switching capacity 7A (2.5 A) 250 VACSwitching point adjustable over full actuator rotation 0

to 10. Pre-setting with scale possible.

Set switching points lockable.





Housing NEMA type 2



Agency listings CE


Weight 5.3 oz [150 g] 7.4 oz [210 g]

Wiring diagram

S2

q

q

q

q

q

q

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S1

q

q

q

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

Voltage Resistive Inductive120 7 A 5.0 A

250 7 A 2.5 A



159


©





the manual override button and rotate the actuator fully

counter-clockwise.

2. Invert SN . switch and turn the driver disk fully clockwise asindicated.

3. Slide SN . switch onto actuator and check for the correct

mating of the driver disk to the universal clamp. Securewith screw.


5. Remount the white plastic pointer only onto SN . switch.

SN1, SN2 Auxiliary switchesFor the direct coupled actuator NM2…

OperationThe SN1 and SN2 auxiliary switches are used to indicatewhen a desired position of a damper is reached or to interface

additional controls for a specific control sequence. They aremodular units that mounts directly onto the NM type actuators

and held in place with a prefitted screw. A driver disk isattached to the actuator clamp and offers direct transmission

of the actuator position to the microswitch operating cams.

The switching points can be set over the full scale of 0 to 10simply by adjusting the slotted discs.

NOTE: will not mount to NM actuators manufactured priorto May 1994

®

Wiring Diagrams

SN2

q

q

q

q

q

q

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

SN1

q

q

q

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

1

2 3 4 5

Voltage Resistive Inductive120 6.0 A 5.0 A

250 6.0 A 2.5 A

Technical Data SN1 SN2




Electrical connection 3 ft. 18 GA cable [1 m long 0.75mm2]





Housing material rating UL 94-V0 (flammability rating)Agency listings CE

Weight 4 oz [125 g] 5.6 oz [175 g]



160

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©





2. Invert SA… US switch and turn the driver disk fully clock-

wise as indicated.

3. Slide SA… US switch onto actuator and check for the cor-

rect mating of the driver disk to the universal clamp. Securewith screw.


5. Remount the white plastic pointer only onto SA… US switch.

Auxiliary switches SA1 US, SA2 USFor the direct coupled actuator AM2…

OperationThe SA1 US and SA2 US auxiliary switches are used to indi-cate when a desired position of a damper is reached or to inter-

face additional controls for a specific control sequence. Theyare modular units that mount directly onto the AM type actua-

tors and held in place with a prefitted screw. A driver disk isattached to the actuator clamp and offers direct transmission of

the actuator position to the microswitch operating cams. The

switching points can be set over the full scale of 0 to 1 simplyby adjusting the slotted discs.

®

Wiring Diagrams

SA2 US

q

q

q

q

q

q

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

SA1 US

q

q

q

NC

NO

S1

S2

S3

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

1

2 3 4 5

Voltage Resistive Inductive120 6.0 A 5.0 A250 6.0 A 2.5 A

Technical Data SA1 US SA2 US










Housing material rating UL 94-5V (flammability rating)

Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA 4813 02 certified, CE

Weight 8 oz [225 g] 9.3 oz [265 g]



161


©



P… Feedback potentiometer For the direct coupled actuator SM2…/ GM2…

®

Application:The P… feedback potentiometers are used for continuous

damper control in conjunction with normal commercial P–con-

trollers with feedback signals. The P… units can also be usedin conjunction with moving coil instruments for position indica-tion, or they can serve as a positioner for parallel operating

actuators when used with normal commercial controllers.

OperationThe P… feedback potentiometer is mounted onto the damperactuators. A spindle transmits the rotary motion of the motor

positively to the potentiometer, and no adjustments whatsoev-er are necessary. If required, 2 potentiometer units P… can

be mounted on top of each other.

AssemblyUse the 4 long bolts, where 2 P… units are mounted on top of

each other.

Types

P500 Feedback potentiometer 500Ω



Technical Data P…

Resistance values as above

Output 1W

Tolerance ± 5%Linearity ± 2%

Resolution min. 1%

Residual resistance max. 5% on both sides






Housing NEMA type 2



Weight 5.3 oz [150 g]

P1

P2

P3

P…

0

10

Wiring diagram



162

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Feedback potentiometer PA…USFor the direct coupled actuator AM2…

®

Application:The PA… US feedback potentiometers are used with AM actu-ators to provide a resistive signal which varies with damper

position. The PA… US units are applied with commercial pro-portional temperature controllers to provide feedback of the

damper position, or with electric or electronic meters to pro-vide position indication. The signal can also be used as a

positioner for parallel operation of multiple actuators.

OperationThe PA… US feedback potentiometer is mounted onto thedamper actuator. A driver disk is attached to the actuator

clamp and offers direct transmission of the actuator to the

potentiometer.




2. Invert PA… US and turn the driver disk fully clockwise as

indicated.

3. Slide PA… US onto actuator and check for the correct mat-

ing of the driver disk to the universal clamp. Secure withscrew.

4. Remount the white plastic pointer only, from the pointer

assembly, onto PA… US.

Types

PA500 US Feedback potentiometer 500Ω



Technical Data PA… US

Resistance values as above

Output 1W

Tolerance ± 5%

Linearity ± 2%Resolution min. 1%

Residual resistance max. 5% on both sides






Housing NEMA type 2

Housing rating UL94-5V (flammability rating)


Agency listings UL 873 listed, CSA 4813 02 certified, CE


Weight 8.8 oz [250 g]

P1

P2

P3

PA…

0

10

Wiring diagram

1 2

3 4



163


©



3 5/16 [84]

SQ

2 5/16 [59.5]

1 7/8 [48]

SQ

SGA24

Technical Data SGA24, SGF24



Control signal Y .5 to 10 VDC; 2 to 10 VDC (switchable)

Power output up to 10 actuators (1 mA max)

Degree of protection (SGA24 only NEMA 4 [1P54])Connection Terminals (14 ga. wire max)


SGF24

1/4 [6]

11/16 [27]

3/64 to 13/64 [1 to 5]Panel thickness

Y = 0 to 10 VDC

SGA24SGF24

Y = 2 to 10 VDC

SGA24SGF24

SGA24, SGF24 PositionersFor proportional actuators with a working range of 0 to 10 VDC or 2 to 10 VDC

®

ApplicationThese positioners are intended for the remote control of mod-ulating actuators or for use as a minimum positioner (providing

a minimum limit for the output signal from a modulating con-troller). The control range is 0 to 100% of the angle of rotationof the actuator.

Positioner SGA24 is for surface mounting with a NEMA 4housing included. Positioner SGF24 is for flush mounting.

OperationThe positioner receives its supply voltage through terminals 1and 2. A rotary knob is turned, producing a proportional con-trol signal (Y) at the output (terminal 3) of either .5 to 10 VDCor 2 to 10 VDC and therefore a proportional change in theposition of the actuator between 0 and 100%. When used fora minimum limit, the positioner works as a higher of 2 signalselector. This function allows only the signal from the con-troller or positioner, whichever is greater, to go to the actuator.

FunctionThe changeover from 2 to10 V to 0 to 10 V is selected bymeans of a slide switch on the printed circuit board.The angle of rotation of the knob can be limited mechanically,by moving the adjustable stops under the knob.

AccessoryZG-SGF Mounting plate for single gang wiring box

Wiring diagram

Dimensions All ratings in brackets are metric.

Drilling template for SGF24 (flush mount)

Changeover switch

ø .136 [3.4]# 29 drill

ø 1/4 [6.4]

1 7/8 [48]

SQ

1.10 [28]

q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

…SR US

A

B

q

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

4 + Z

SGA24 SGF24

q

q

q

q

q

q

q

q

24 VACTransformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

…24-SR US

1 Common

2 +

3 + Y

4 +SGA24 SGF24

(–)

(+)

0 to 10 VDCControl Signal

A B

off off 0%

off on 0%

on off 0 to 100%

on on 100%

Override control

Damper control

SGA24 SGF24

Minimum Position Setting

Provide overload protectionand disconnect as required.

Override switches are optional.

A 500Ω resistor (ZG-R01) must be added for 4 to 20 mA control

1

3

3

1

1

2

2

2

Ω 500Ω

Overridecontrolcannot beused with…MFT USproducts.



164

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


P250

1=COM2=24VHOT3=PULSE+4=PULSE—5=AUXV6=SIG. OUT

A

B

1 0P1

P2

NORM

TRIAC

1 2 3 4 5 6

2 3 / 8 "

2 1/4" 1"

ApplicationsThe PTA-250 converts a single pulse-width modulated input to ananalog, 2 to 10 VDC, output to modulate a Belimo -SR actuator.

The PTA-250 is available for replacement of existing installations.The …MFT product can replace 100% of the PTA-250 applica-tions, more effectively.

OperationA timed contact or solid state closure from the controlling micro-processor controller is converted to a linear analog output with 256steps of resolution. The last output is held until the PTA-250receives the end of the next pulsed output. The PTA-250’s outputwill not wrap around if an excessively long input pulse is received.Four input pulse clock rates are jumper selectable. Normal/Triacinput positions are also jumper selectable. The input signal can beoptically isolated from the PTA-250 circuit and can accept either posi-tive or negative polarity. A red LED indicator is provided to indicatethat power is applied to the PTA-250 and that the microprocessor is

functioning. A green LED indicator is provided to indicate the pres-ence of a pulse from the controller.

Note: The onboard zero and span adjustments are not forfield use.

42

5

5

q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5 Aux. Power Output

6 Output 0 to 10 VDC

PTA-250

1

Line

Volts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

…-SR US

3

2



Consult controller instruction data for more detailedinstallation information.

To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch.

The PTA-250 and actuator may be powered from thesame transformer.

3

4

See controlinterface

diagramsbelow.

q

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot3 AC

4 AC

5

6

PTA-250To …-SR Actuator

Triac, common pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC

5

6


Triac, hot pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

24 VAC Transformer

BASPower

PTAPower

1 Common2 + Hot

3 AC

4 AC

5

6


Triac, pulsed signal (isolated circuit)

q

q

q

q

qLineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5 Aux. Power Output

6


N.O.

Relay pulsed signal (non-isolated circuit)

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 + Signal Input

4 – Signal Input

5

6


N.O.

Relay pulsed signal (isolated circuit)

Separatepower supply

12 to 24VDC/VAC

q

Pulse width modulation interface PTA-250To convert a pulse width modulated signal to a 2 to 10 VDC signal for Belimo proportional actuators. (Series 3)

®

Technical Data PTA-250

Power supply 24 VAC ±15%24 VDC ±15%

Power consumption <1 W


Input

isolation: optically isolated (when wired as such)

type: normal or triac, jumper selectable

trigger level: 12 to 24 VAC/VDC or dry contact to com

time between 12.5 milliseconds mintrigger pulses:

impedance: VAC - 500 Ω, VDC - 10 KΩ

pulse duration/ four selectable ranges, in secondsresolution: of dry contact or SSR closure ± 40%

of signal increment

Range 1: 0.0235 to 6 seconds/in 0.0235 sec increments

Range 2: 0.0196 to 5 seconds/in 0.0196 sec increments

Range 3: 0.1 to 25.5 seconds/in 0.100 sec increments

Range 4: 0.59 to 2.93 seconds/in in 0.0092 increments

Output - voltage: 2 to 10 VDC

- current: 15 mA max

- accuracy: ± 2%

Electrical connection wire terminals, 14 gauge max


Operating humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing

Mounting Snap-Track (provided)

Dimensions - board: 2 3/16” x 2 3/16” x 9/16”

- with Track: 2 3/8" x 2 1/4" x 15/16"

Weight 1.5 oz

Wiring diagram

A

B

1 0

A

B

1 0

A

B

1 0

Range 1 Range 2

Range 3 Range 4

A

B

1 0

Pulse timing selection Normal/Triac input selection

PTA-250

Dimensions

Control interface drawings

NORMAL

P2

TRIAC



165


©



E O U T P U T

S P A N

Zero Offset

adjustment

Span

adjustment

1 2 3 4 4 = O U T P U T

P O T S

= I N C R E A S E O U T P U T

1 = C O M

2 = 2 4 V H O T

3 = I N P U T

B E L I M O

I R M - 1 0 0

S P A N

4/20M

IRM-100

2 3/8"

1 7/8" 15/16”

ApplicationThe IRM-100 input rescaling module is designed to change non-standard voltage or current signal levels into a 2 to 10 VDC out-

put to modulate Belimo -SR type actuators. The IRM-100 is avail-able for replacement of existing installations. The …MFT productcan replace 100% of the IRM-100 applications, more effectively.

OperationThe IRM-100 is installed between a controller and a Belimo...-SR actuator. The module can be adjusted to work with azero offset of 0 to 18 VDC and a span range of 2.6 to 17 VDC.The IRM-100 has a 2 pin jumper mounted to the circuit board.When the jumper is connected between these 2 pins, a 4 to20 mA signal can be fed directly into the IRM. The resultbeing the conversion of a wide range of analog control signalsto a 2 to 10 VDC range.

The IRM-100 may also be used to sequence several actuatorsfrom one signal source. This is done by adjusting the IRMunits to work at different input ranges. (Example: 2 to 5 VDC,5 to 8 VDC, 8 to 11 VDC, etc.)

Calibration1. Attach a variable signal source to the input and power wires

to the IRM-100.2. Apply power.3. Input the minimum signal level.4. Adjust the offset potentiometer to produce a 2 VDC signal

at the output. A clockwise rotation of the potentiometerscrew will increase the output signal.

5. Input the maximum signal level.6. Adjust the span adjustment to produce a 10 VDC signal at

the output. A clockwise rotation of the potentiometer screwwill increase the output signal.

7. Double check the input-output calibration and install.

2

To other

actuators

q

q

q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

Control

Signal

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Signal Input

4 Output, 2 to 10 VDC

IRM-100

1

1

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Y1

4 Y2

5 U

…-SR US

(–)(+)

q

q

3

2


The controller should be powered from a separatetransformer.

The actuator and IRM-100 may be powered from thesame transformer.

Consult controller instruction data for more detailedinstallation information.

To reverse control rotation, use the reversing switch.

3

4

5

5

4

IRM-100 Input rescaling moduleTo adjust the zero start point and working span of Belimo proportional ( . . –SR) actuators. (Series 3)

®

Technical Data IRM-100

Power supply supply voltage: 24 VAC ± 15%

24 VDC ± 15%

Power consumption < 1 watt


Input voltage: max voltage: 25 VDC

zero (starting point): 0 to 18 VDC

span adjustment: 2.6 to 17 VDC

impedance: 400 KΩ

0 to 20 mA

impedance: 500 Ω

Output voltage: 2 to 10 VDC

current: 15 mA max

Electrical connection wire terminals, 14 gauge max




Dimensions board: 1 3/16" x 2 3/16" x 9/16"

w/Snap-Track: 1 7/8" x 2 3/8" x 15/16"

Weight .9 oz.

Wiring diagram

Dimensions

Jumper not

connected toboth pins forvoltage appli-cations (asshipped)

Jumper on

both pins for4 to 20 mAapplications

current:



166

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


Application:To control reheat coils and/or a fan stage in a fan-poweredterminal unit. The ADS-100 is controlled by a 2 to 10 VDC

reheat output of a temperature controller. (TRS-M)

Operation:The ADS-100 is designed to switch up to three independent

stages of reheat on and off, according to a 2 to 10 VDC sig-

nal. The three output stages are furnished with a triac output.Each stage can be adjusted independently from each other

over the 0 to 2.4°F throttling range of the TRS-M temperaturecontroller.

The ADS-100 is shipped pre-adjusted, as shown in the follow-

ing table. (Based on differential from setpoint)

If desired, each stage may be field readjusted for special

requirements. Three red LED indicators are provided to verifywhen the stages are energized.

Setpoint readjustment:Tools required: small screwdriver, voltmeter.

To readjust the output stages, the following procedure is used:Connect the voltmeter to the desired switchpoint reference

signal output and terminal 1 (COM). Readjust the switch pointreference signal output with the corresponding potentiometer

to your desired switch point.The adjustment range is 2.5 to 9.5 VDC. If you go below or above

these values the ADS-100 may not switch off or on properly.If this occurs you have to increase or decrease your switchinglevel until the ADS-100 works correctly.

q

q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Signal Input

4 Contactor5 Ref. signal

6 Contactor

7 Ref. signal

8 Contactor

9 Ref. signal

ADS-100COM

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩

∩ ∩∩

Reheat output(2 to 10 VDC)from TRS-M

thermostat orother controller

Reheat stage(24 VAC con-tactors 10 VAmax. per stage)

5,7,9 = Switch point reference signal for manualadjustment of stages 1,2, & 3 respectively.


Stage 1

#1

#2

#3

1

1

Stage 2

Stage 3

2

(–)(+)

2

q

q

q

Analog to digital switch ADS-100For Belimo proportional ( . . –SR) actuators.

®

Wiring diagram

Dimensions

1st. stage 2nd. stage 3rd. stage

Switch ON -0.45°F -1.35°F -2.25°F

Switch OFF -0.15°F -1.05°F -1.95°F

ADS-100

3 7/16"

2" 1 3/8"

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

24 VAC Transformer

1 Common

2 + Hot

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ADS-100

q

– +

Voltmeter q

q

q

ReferenceSignalVDC

Reheat stage turn on from setpoint

Switchpoint adjustment drawings

Technical Data ADS-100

Power supply 24 VAC ± 20% 50/60 HZ


Transformer sizing 3 VA (not including contactors)

Electrical connection 9 pole wire-terminal

Control input 2 to 10 VDC

Input impedance 100 K Ω

Adjusting range 2.5 to 9.5 VDC

Dead band .3°F fixed

Switching capacity 24 VAC 10 VA max.

(voltage sinking triac)


Dimensions 3 1/4" x 2" (3 7/16" x 2" w/snap-track)



167


©



2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

max4A (T)

SM24 US( + ) ( + ) ( – )

~ ~ COM

3 2 1

+

–

NSV-BAT (2) or equiv.

24 VACCOM~

2 3 10 9

1 11 NSV 24

+

–

max4A (T)

SM24-SR US( + ) ( – )

HOT COM

3 2 1

NSV-BAT (2) or equiv.

Y1

24 VACCOM~

Wiring diagram

ApplicationSeveral Belimo damper actuators can be used either with 24VAC or 24 VDC.

In case of a power failure, the NSV24 battery back-up unitswitches the damper actuator from its main AC power supply

over to the 24 VDC battery to drive the actuators to their safe-ty position.

For easy maintenance, the battery back-up system is placed

in the control panel, not in the actuator.Several actuators may be powered by one back-up module.

The batteries are separate from theNSV24.

OperationThe NSV24 is connected to the same

24 VAC power source as the damper actuators. It alsocharges the 24 V (2-12 volt batteries) storage battery. Its

charge current is limited to 150 mA maximum, and the maxi-mum charge voltage is temperature compensated.

In case of a power failure, the NSV24 switches immediately

over to the battery power source, and according to the controlfunction, the actuators will move to their safety position.

After 250 seconds, the batteries are disconnected from theactuators to prolong battery life. Because of this, a safe bat-

tery back-up can be provided for several short-term failures.

The main power source operation is indicated by a greenLED, and the battery power source by a red LED.

Connectable ActuatorsModel Maximum per moduleGM24 US 20

GM24-MFT US 15GM24-SR US 15AM24 US 30

AM24-MFT US 30AM24-SR US 30

NM24 US 30

NM24-MFT US 30NM24-SR US 30

LM24-3 US 30LM24-MFT US 30

LM24-SR-2.0 US 30

AccessoriesNSV-BAT 12 VDC 1.3 Ah battery (2 required)

Battery back-up module NSV24 ®

3" 2 5/16"

3 3 / 1 6 "

1 "

Dimensions

Technical Data NSV24


Fusing 4A slow blow fuse

Power consumption Min. 5W (without actuator load)

Transformer 8 VA

Batteries 24 V Nominal 1.2 Ah (2-12 volt lead-

acid batteries; batteries not supplied

with module)

Maintenance The batteries should be checked

annually (approximate life is 6 years)

Charging circuit Charge current max. 150 mA

Charge voltage 24-27 V, temperature

compensated

Battery back-up operation 24 V nominal 1.2 Ah, max. 60 W

auto shut off after 250 seconds

Indication LED Green - Main power source operation

(battery will be charged)

Red - Battery back-up operation

Mounting Mounted in the control panel with an

11 terminal plug-in base (not suppliedwith module)

Ambient temperature 14°F to +122°F [-10°C . . . +50°C]

Note: Fail-safe direction must havenormally closed contact.

AM24-SR US

AM24 US



168

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ApplicationThe NSV-BAT battery is for use with the NSV24 battery back-up module. It is a sealed, maintenance free, lead-acid battery.

Two NSV-BAT batteries are required for one NSV24.

NSV-BAT 12 V Battery

Dimensions

Technical Data NSV-BAT

Battery type Lead-acid

Voltage 12VDC

Nominal capacity 1.2 AH

Connections .187 male spade

Weight 1.32 lb [.6 kg]

®

2.13"[54]

2"[51]

3.82"[97]

1.65"[42]

+

–

ApplicationThe ZG-R01 is a 499 Ω Resistor which has been encased in a

section of heat shrink tubing with short sections of hook upwire.The ZG-R01 is used to convert a 4 to 20mA signal into a

2 to 10 VDC control signal.

ZG-R01 Resistor for 4 to 20 mA conversions

Dimensions

Approx. 9"

q q

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot


4

5

Ω ZG-R01

ApplicationThe ZG-R02 is a voltage divider designed so that when connected

to a 100 KΩ input impedance, the output signal is 50% if the

input signal. The voltage divider circuit is encased in a short sec-tion of heat shrink tubing with three short sections of hook up wire.

ApplicationFor use with the AF24-MFT95 US or SM24-SR94 USactuators and Honeywell ® controllers

ZG-R03 - see table to left

ZG-R05 - see table to leftZG-R06 - see table to left

ZG-R02 50% voltage divider

Dimensions

Resistor kits for multiple actuator applications

Approx. 10"

1

1

ZG-R02Ω

Output0 to 10 VDC TypeSignal Input

COMCOM

Grey

Black

White

The impedance of the device attached must be 100kΩ.


2 1403 71.5

4 47.55 37.56 28

135 Ω OperationNumber of ResistanceActuators Ω

1 2372 1503 124

4 1135 1056 97.6

4 to 20 mA Operation


2 13003 9104 768

For Honeywell ® ElectronicSeries 90 Circuits

(W7100, W973, T775)

Resistor Kit No. ZG-R03 Resistor Kit No. ZG-R05 Resistor Kit No. ZG-R06



169


©



ApplicationThe ZG-CBNS US accessory is used when the applicationrequires the wiring terminations to be made at the actuator.

OperationThe ZG-CBNS US serves as an electrical junction box. Theproducts that can be used with this accessory are as follows:

NF24 US, NF24-S US,NF120 US NF120-S US

NF24-SR US, NF24-MFT US

AF24 US, AFR24 US, AFR24-S US

AF120 US, AFR120 US, AFR120-S US

AF230 US

AF24-SR US, AFR24-SR US. AF24-MFT US

Due to the internal volume of this junction box, according toUL requirements, The ZG-CBNS US CANNOT be used with

the following products:

NF24-S2 US

AF24-S US

AF120-S US

AF230-S US

Technical Data ZG-CBNS US

Voltage rating 250 VAC

Electrical connection Maximum 5 line voltage connection

Housing rating UL94 5V

Material type FR/ABS CYCOLAC KJW4051

Ambient temperature -22°F to+122°F [-30°C to +50°C]


Agency listing UL 873 (pending)Quality standards ISO 9001

Weight <.5 lbs

ZG-CBNS USJunction Box for NF…(-S) and AF…*Actuators

®

ZG-CBNS US Junction box

Assembly and Installation

1. Remove supply voltage from the actuator and / or the auxil-

iary switch.

2. Remove the plastic insert from the actuator conduit fitting.

(1)

3. Cut the actuator cable (s) to approximately 6 inches.

Remove approximately 4 inches of the black cable insula-

tion. Be sure not to damage the insulation of the conduc-

tors inside. This will void the actuators warranty.

4. Insert the actuator cable (s) into the junction box holes (Aand B). Slide the housing towards the actuator.

5. Insert the cable (s) through strain relief assembly (3),

thread strain relief assembly to the actuator conduit fitting

(1) and tighten. Thread the nut (4) over the cable and

tighten. Repeat process for the second cable. If no second

cable is present, use the plug (5) with the nut (4). The sec-

ond strain relief assembly is required to properly secure the

housing to the actuator.

6. Assemble the cover and gasket: Knock out the appropriate

conduit hole in the junction box cover (7). Pull field wiring

through the hole in the cover and install the field supplied

conduit fitting. Optional, knockouts are available at the

sides of the junction box.

7. When wiring connections are completed, secure the box

cover in place with the supplied screws (8).

8. Install the actuator.



170

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


ApplicationThe PS-100 power supply and signal simulator is designed to

operate most proportional, floating, and on-off style actuatorswithout the presence of a controller.

The PS-100 can produce 24 VAC on-off and floating control

signal along with a 0 to 10 VDC and 135Ω proportional sig-nal. A multi-function digital display is provided which can read

either the 0 to 10 VDC output or a 0 to 10 VDC feedback sig-nal either as voltage or percentage of control.

The PS-100 comes with a 120 to 24 VAC, plug into the walltransformer for power. Both the PS-100 and transformer are

supplied in a black fabric carrying case.

Replacement Power Supply: PS-XFMR

3.75"[9.5]

2" [5]6.25"[16]2.75"

[7]

Dimensions

Power supply, signal simulator PS-100

Technical Data PS-100

Power supply 120 VAC 50/60 HzPower consumption < 4 W without actuator

Transformer Primary: 120 VAC, 35 W

Secondary: 24 VAC, Class 2 trans.

PN: PS-XFMR

Terminal outputs Push-button, wire terminals (12)

On-off, Floating Point

135Ω, 0 to 10 VDC

Input 0 to 10 VDC

Display LCD

Readouts, Output 0 to 10 VDC in volts or percentage

based on a 2 to 10 VDC control span

Readouts, Input 0 to 10 VDC in volts or percentagebased on a 2 to 10 VDC control span

Weight 3 lbs [1.4 kg] with case

Wiring diagram

ApplicationThe ZG-X40 is a 40 VA, 120 to 24 VAC transformer. It is

designed so that both the primary and secondary leads exit

through the same side of a 4 1/4" square outlet box cover.With this design, all wiring can be done inside a standard J-

box with a minimum amount of labor.

Wire Specification

No. 18 AWG leads, 6 1/2" length

Termination Color

Primary White-Black

Secondary Yellow-Yellow

Maximum Number of Like Actuators per Transformer

Transformer ZG-X4040 VA, 120 to 24 VAC Transformer

ZG-X40

120 VAC 24 VAC

Yellow

Yellow

White

Black

4 1/4

4 1/4

2 3/4

Technical Data ZG-X40

Primary Voltage 120 VAC 50/60 HzSecondary Voltage 24 VAC

Max VA Rating 40 VA

Connections 6 1/2" leads with stripped ends

Type Class 2

Mounting Method 4 1/4" square outlet box cover

Agency Approvals UL 1585, CSA 22.2 #66

®

Model # Qty

NM24 US 11NM24-SR US 13

AM24 US 8

SM24-S US 3

AM24-SR US 8

SM24-SR94 US 8

GM24 US 6

Model # Qty

GM24-SR US 5AF24. . US 4

NF24(-S) US 5

NF 120(-S) US 5

NF24-SR US 6

LF24 US 8

LF24-SR US 8

Dimensions

Refers to appropriate actuator documentation for specific VA ratings.



171


©



ZG-HTR NF/AF thermostat/heater kitFor NF/AF Series actuators

ApplicationThe ZG-HTR Thermostat/Heater kit is designed to be fieldinstalled to the NF and AF series actuators. The ZG-HTR pro-

vides a thermostatically controlled heater which allows theNF/AF actuators to be used below their normal low ambient

temperature rating. At approximately 10°F [-12°C] the heaterenergizes to maintain the actuators internal temperature to

within working limits. The rubberized heating element has an

adhesive back which attaches to the side of the actuator hous-ing. The thermostat assembly mounts to the rear of the actua-

tor and provides for the connection of the 24 VAC supply volt-age. The actuator/heater assembly should be contained in a

housing, similar to the ZS-100 Weather Shield, to achieve best

results.

Instructions1. Determine which side of the NF/AF actuator the heater

element will be fastened to.

2. Clean the mounting surface to remove any dust, oil film,

etc. which may prevent the heater from attaching secure-ly. A cleaning solvent which leaves no residue is recom-

mended.

3. Carefully peel back the clear plastic backing from the

heater element. Care must be taken not to handle theadhesive back or have it make contact with any surface

prior to mounting it to the actuator side.

4. Without making contact between the actuator and heater,position the heater element so that the wire end is

towards the rear of the actuator. The edge by the wireshould line up with the center of the 1/4 bolt hole on thetop of the actuator as indicated in the drawing at the left.

Center the heater element so it is equally spaced from topto bottom on the actuator side.

Warning: Once the adhesive back makes contact with the actuator surface, it should not be removed.

5. Carefully make contact with the top side of the heater and

gradually roll the heater element to make full contact withthe actuator side.

Technical Data ZG-HTR



Heater output 35 watts

Actuator low ambient rating with enclosure: -40°F [-40°C]

enclosure with1” insulation: -58°F [-50°C]

Weight 11 oz [320 g]

ZG-HTR

Hea

ter

To 24 VDC

Wiring Box

Thermostat/CoverAssembly

Wire Nut

3/8” to 3/4”

3/8” to 5/8”

3/4” to 1.05”

Standard:

Optional*

*with K4-1clamp


AF/NF

actuator

1/4” BoltHole

Z G - H T R

H e a t e r

®



172

D 2 0 2 3 0 / 5 4 3 2 1 - 0 5 / 0 2 - 2 0 M - E


©


6. If a conduit fitting is supplied with the actuator, on the side

of the actuator which will have the wiring box, remove anddiscard the 2 screws which fasten the conduit fitting to the

actuator.

7. Position the wiring box at the rear of the actuator. Mountthe wiring box to the rear of the actuator using only the

left screw, the one shown without a washer.

Note: If the conduit fitting is not provided on the model

actuator being used, use the nuts provided to secure thewiring box to the actuator.

8. Feed the cable from the heater element through the slotat the rear of the actuator into the hole in the bottom of

the wiring box.

9. Slip the cable through the wire clamp removing any slackin the wire from the heater to the fastening point in the

wiring box. Fasten the clamp to the actuator using the

remaining screw and washer.

10. Determine which conduit fitting hole in the wiring box willbe used to provide the power source to the heater circuit.

11. Remove the desired knock-out in the wiring box and, ifused, fasten the conduit fitting.

12. Install the actuator following the actuator installation

instructions.

13. Fasten one of the red heater wires to one of the blackthermostat wires using the wire nut supplied.

14. Connect 24 VAC power to the remaining wires.

15. Fasten the thermostat/cover assembly to the wiring box.

NF/AF thermostat/heater kit ZG-HTRFor NF/AF Series actuators

Wiring diagram

2

2

3

31

1

24 VAC Transformer

Line

Volts


The ZG-HTR may be wired to the same transformer as

the actuator. Total VA ratings must be observed.

Power to the ZG-HTR must be applied continuouslyduring the heating season. Do not wire the ZG-HTR tothe on-off control signal when on-off type actuators arebeing used.

ZG-HTRHEATER STRIP

Thermo-stat

COM

HOT

q

q

q

To other actuators

®



173


©



Application information ®

Special Control Range Applications

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Input, 2 to 6 V

4 Output

(–)

(+)Control Signal0 to 10 VDC

4

2

3

1

IRM-100

q

q

q

1 Common

2 + Hot

3 Input, 6 to 10 V

4 Output

3

5 0 0

Ω

IRM AAdjusted for 2 to 6 VDC range.

IRM BAdjusted for 6 to 10 VDC range.

IRM-100

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

3

…-SR US

…-SR US

qq

qq

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

3

ACTUATOR A

Adjusted for 2 to 6 VDC range.

ACTUATOR BAdjusted for 6 to 10 VDC range.

mA VDC

4 2

5 2.5

6 3

7 3.5

8 4

9 4.5

10 5

11 5.5

12 6

13 6.5

14 7

15 7.5

16 817 8.5

19 9.5

20 10

IRM-100Voltage Settings

Based on4 to 20 mA

2



Consult controller instruction data for moredetailed installation information.

500Ω resistor if signal provided is 4 to 20 mA

3

4

Control Signal Belimo Actuator Accessory Notes

1 to 5 VDC LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceNM24-MFT US Set start point for 1 VDC, span for 4 VDCAM24-MFT USGM24-MFT USNF24-MFT USAF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

4 to 20 mA Any -MFT,-SR Actuator ZG-R01, or Wire the ZG-R01 across the wires #1 and #3500Ω, 1/2 w resistor

10.5 to 13.5 VDC LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceNM24-MFT US Set start point for 10.5 VDC, span for 3 VDCAM24-MFT USAM24-MFT USGM24-MFT US

NF24-MFT USAF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

14 to 17 VDC LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceNM24-MFT US Set start point for 14 VDC, span for 3 VDCAM24-MFT USSM24-MFT USGM24-MFT USNF24-MFT USAF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

Pulse Width LM24-MFT US None Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceModulation NM24-MFT US

AF24-MFT US

AM24-MFT USSM24-MFT USNF24-MFT USAF24-MFT USLF24-MFT US

*Preset at factory or use MFT Handy deviceIRM-100 Calibrate the IRM-100 for an input range of 1 to 5 VDC. Calibrate IRM-100 2-10 in 2 to 10 out for signal amplification.

Sequencing Two or More Actuators With One Control Signal using the IRM-100



Application information®

IRM-100 used as a current amplifierIn some applications, the capacity of a controller output maynot have current available to control multiple end devices. An

example would be a controller which has an output current of.5 mA maximum. If 10 AFR24-SR US actuators have to be

driven from the same output, the current requirement wouldbe I = E/R = (10 volts)/(100000 Ω) = .1 mA for each actuator.

For the 10 actuators, 1 mA of current would be necessary to

properly control the actuators.

The IRM-100 may be used as an interface to provide a highercurrent capacity to the system. The IRM-100 has an output

capacity of 15 mA. This higher level output can handle a

greater number of actuators. By calibrating the IRM-100 for a2 to 10 VDC input to achieve a 2 to 10 VDC output, IRM-100

provides this added capacity for the system.

The same circuit will also work if a 4 to 20 mA signal is used.A 500 Ω resistor is placed across terminal #1 and #3 which

converts the 4 to 20 mA to 2 to 10 VDC.

q

24 VAC Transformer

LineVolts

1 Common2 + Hot


4 Y2 Output, 2 to 10 V

(–)

(+)


4

2

3

1

IRM-100

q

q

q

q

q

1 Common

2 + Hot


4 Y2

5 U

3

5 0 0 Ω

…-SR US

1 P id l d t ti d di t

Signal to OtherActuators

…SR US…MFT US

belimo actuadores general

Documents